Echo Installation and User Manual PDF

$250.
00
ECHO Intercom Series

®
Installation & User’s Manual
Job #:_________________________
Project Name: ______________ ___________
08-08-08
.
Proprietary Information
The information contained herein is the proprietary property of Federal Signal.
Recipient, by accepting this information agrees that neither this document nor
the information contained herein shall be reproduced or transferred to other
documents or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any other purpose except
as authorized in writing by Federal Signal.
About this Manual
This document is based on information available at the time of its writing. While
efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not
purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, or to provide for
every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or
maintenance. Features may be described herein, which are not present in all
systems. Federal Signal assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this
of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
Federal Signal makes no representation or warranty, expressed,implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness,
sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of
merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
Copyright Information
All information resident in this document is considered copyrighted.
The Federal Signal products described in this instruction manual may include
copyrighted Federal Signal computer programs stored in semiconductor memories
or other mediums. Laws in the United States and foreign countries preserve for
Federal Signal certain exclusive rights to copy or reproduce in any form the
copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Federal Signal
computer programs contained in the Federal Signal products described in this
instruction manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the
express written permission of Federal Signal. Furthermore, the purchase of
Federal Signal products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication,
estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications
of Federal Signal, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that
arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Federal Signal ® is a registered trademark of Federal Signal Corporation.
© 2008 by Federal Signal Corporation., All Rights Reserved
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. i

Conventions Used in this Manual
Examples of scenarios, programming procedures, or operating procedures are

denoted the example symbol.
A note is used to describe an item that requires special attention.
Cautionary notes draw attention to a condition that may cause system malfunction
or other failure.
Functional Aspects
Functional aspects of the system will appear in bold italics:
• Press the T key to answer the call.

• The Routine LED will light.
• Select Function Keys from the main menu.
Operating Modes
Modes of operation for the system will appear in an italicized font:
• Run mode
• Day mode
LCD
Text displayed on the LCD will appear as follows:
• PRIVACY
• EXTENSION
ii © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

ECHO 460 Intercom System
Table of Contents
General Description
Central Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Central Exchange Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Central Exchange Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Central Exchange Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Standard Size Exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Central Exchange Cabinet Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
System Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Central Exchange Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ECHO-RMCR Digital Card Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ECHO-RMPS Power Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Cat. 4656 Analog Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Cat. 4659 Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ECHO-RMCC Conference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ECHO-RMAC Alarm Diagnostic Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ECHO-RMRI Digital Voice Recorder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ECHO-RTC Real Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Cat. 4377 Logic Unit Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Cat. 4378 Relay Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Administrative Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Cat. 5265/5266 Direct Select Console and Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Master Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
E-IST Master Call Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Cat. 4321 Master with Hygienic Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Call Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
E-MIST/E-MISM Flush Wall Handset Master Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Digital Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Cat. 4308/4309 Sentinel Sound Detector Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Cat. 4211/4213 Single Call Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
E-SSMB1 High Security with Mushroom Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2 High Security Single/Dual Call . . . . . . . . . 1-9
E-DD1/E-DD2 Single, Dual Call . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
E-SSMB1KR High Security Call Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Cat. 4327 Elevator Car Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1

ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Analog Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Cat. 4210/4215 High-Security Analog T/L Substation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Special Stations and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
ECHO-PAI Public Page Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Cat. 4325-NK Handset Control Station with Gooseneck Microphone. . . . . . . 1-11
ECHO-BGM Audio Program Distribution Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
ECHO-AIU Audio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Cat. 4348 Control Station with Gooseneck Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
ECHO-CID Caller ID Telephone Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 4363 Two-Way Radio Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Station Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 9754 Modem to Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 4377 Logic Interface Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 4378 Relay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Cat. 4379 Dry Contact Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Cat. 9752 Telco Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Backboxes and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Cat. 4312 Flush Mount Backbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Cat. 4314 Flush Mount Backbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Cat. 4315 Surface Mount Backbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Cat. 4317 High Security Surface Mount Backbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Cat. 9867 Surface Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Dome and Strobe Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Cat. 9505/9506 Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Cat. 9507/9508/9509 Call Strobe Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Operational Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Master Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Admin Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Administrative Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Handset Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Name Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Placing a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Adaptable Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Busy Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Computer Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Failed Station Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Hands-Free, Two-Way Loudspeaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
2 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Invalid Extension Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Limits, Time-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Pre-Announce Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Private Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
RS-232 Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Restricted Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Standard Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Call Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Admin Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Locking Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Non-Locking Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Standard Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Busy Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Pre-Installation Planning
Exchange Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Centralized and Distributed Exchange Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Central Exchange Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
L Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
L Node Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Networking L Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
M Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Networking M Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
N & O Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Node Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Determining Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
General Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Installation & System Wiring
Central Exchange Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locating the Central Exchange Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Unpacking the Exchange and Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Optional Battery Backup Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
External Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Mount Enclosure and Install Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PCB Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Electro Static Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Inserting PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

PCB Card Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Setting Dipswitches on Digital Switch (DS) Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
SW # 2. and SW # 3. Node Type Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
SW # 1. Standard and Top Node Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
SW # 4. Normal Code and Default Code Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
SW # 5. Normal and Initialize Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
SW # 6. is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
SW # 7. Normal and Diagnostic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Cat. 4601 Central Exchange 96 Station Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Cat. 4602 Central Exchange 144 Station Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Dipswitch Settings Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
System Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Digital Station Wire and Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Analog Station Wire and Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Exchange Cable Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Cat-5 Cable Digital Switch Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Fiber Optic Digital Switch Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Fiber Optic Connection of a Single Station to the Central Exchange . . . . 3-19
Protection for Off-Premise Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Digital Station Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Central Exchange MDF Station Pair Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
MDF Block Labels for Digital Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Extension Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Modem Wiring at MDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Connecting M4 Termination Blocks to Rear of Central Exchange. . . . . . . 3-26
Analog Station Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
I/O Board for Analog Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Analog Station Wire Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Wiring Digital and Analog Stations on the Same System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Modem Interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
M-Node to M-Node Interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
System Power On Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Preliminary Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Power On Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Single Station Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Exchange to Exchange Connection via 9754 Modem to
Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Extended Range Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Cat. 4377 Logic Interface/Cat. 4378 Relay Interface Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
E-IST Master Station & E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin. Master Wiring . . . . . . . 3-42
ECHO-PAI / ECHO-BGM Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Caller ID Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Remote Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Audio Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Cat. 4327 Elevator Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Equipment
Common and Port Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
ECHO-RMCR Digital Card Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cat. 4656 Analog Line Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cat. 4659 Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
ECHO-RTC Real Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
ECHO-RMAC Alarm Diagnostic Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
ECHO-RMCC Conference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
E-IST Master Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Multi-Call Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substations. 4-15
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4308/09 Sentinel Sound Detector Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Cat. 4210/4215 High-Security Analog Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
ECHO-PAI Public Address Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
ECHO-BGM Program Distribution Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Cat. 4327 Elevator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
ECHO-AIU Audio Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
E-MIST/E-MISM Flush Wall Mount Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cat. 4377/4378 Logic and Relay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
5265 Direct Select Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
System Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Main Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Global Attributes (System Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Node Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Tone Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Time Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
System Wide Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Emergency All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Active Node Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Call Abandonment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Call Forward No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
System Clock Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Telephone Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Admin Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Automatic Dialing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Factory Defaults/Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Talk/Listen Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Local Attributes (Station Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Navigation Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Node/Pair Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Extension Name/Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Station Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Privacy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Privacy Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Single-Digit Speed Dial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Single-Digit Speed Dial (Master Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Single-Digit Speed Dial (Substations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Preempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Administrative Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Two-Digit Speed Dial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Call Forward No Answer (Admin Calls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Call Forward No Answer for Standard Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Backup/Restore Global and Local Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Backup/Restore Global Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Backup/Restore Local Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Display Failed Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Display Code Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Configuration Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Station Data Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
IP Component Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Program Code Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Call Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Sentinel Sound Detector Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Global Sentinel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Local Sentinel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
IP Setup (430 IP System Equipment Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Connecting PC to Cat. 4550 IP Central Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Programming 4550 IP Central Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Connecting PC to Station Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Programming IP Station Hubs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Troubleshooting/Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Inconsistent Entry Errors when Updating Global Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Inconsistent Entry Errors when Updating Local Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Installer Mode Programming
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Program Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Program Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Auto-Assign Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Basic Programming Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

All Master Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
All Substation Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
All Substation Exchange with Admin Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Basic Programming Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
All-Master Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
All-Substation Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
All Substation Exchange with Administrative Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Installer Mode Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Connecting a Master Station for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Manual Programming with a Master Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Global Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Local Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Program Mode Keystroke Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Global Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Digital Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
T/L Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Auto Dial Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Inbound Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Phone Access Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Real Time Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Admin Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
No Answer Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Call Abandonment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Extension Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Emergency All Call Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Reset Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Message Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Answer Back Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Ring Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Page Time Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Tone Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Auto Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Local Station Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Enter Local Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Station Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Station Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Station Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Sound Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Ring Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Privacy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Privacy Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Substation Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Master Station Buttons (Single-Digit Speed Dialing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Preempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Admin Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Two-Digit Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Specialty Station Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substation. . 6-28
Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Global Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Local Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Local Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
ECHO-AIU Audio Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Operation
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Keystroke Operation Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
All Call with Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Place a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Call Forward No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Camp-On Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Call Last Caller/Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Clear All Admin Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Directory Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Door Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Emergency All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Group Page with Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Day Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Night Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Hold & Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Hold & Consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Message Waiting with Tone Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Mobile Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Music Program Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
One-way Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Preempt/Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Privacy Setting (Master Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Public Address Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Speed Dial, Two-Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Speed Dial, Single-Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Auto Conference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Auto Conference Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Placing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Placing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
E-IST Master Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Placing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Canceling a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Multi-Call Substations . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Placing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Canceling a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substations . . . . . . . . 7-22
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Placing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Relay Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Placing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Operational Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Inbound Mode 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Accessible Features in Mode 1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Inbound Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Outbound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Receiving a Standard Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Originating a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Quitting a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Placing a Station on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Single Digit Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Two-Digit Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Call Forward No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Group Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Public Address Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Emergency All Call Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Message Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Door Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Preempt/Break In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Call Last Caller/Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Receiving Admin Type Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Cat. 5265 Direct Select Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
LED Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Call Priority LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Troubleshooting
Station Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Central Exchange Diagnostic Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
ECHO-RMAC Alarm Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Seven Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
ECHO-RMMC Modem Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Master Station Diagnostic Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Troubleshooting Station symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Failed Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Single Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Multiple Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Master Station Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
General Station Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Procedure for uploading ECHO 460 code updates . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Appendix
Installer Worksheets

Figures
General Description
Figure 1.1:Cat. 4601/02, 4603 and 4604 Central Exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Figure 1.2:Pre-Empt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 2.1:Diagram for Systems with Up to 672 Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2.2:System with a 2352Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2.3:System with a 9072 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 3.1:Batteries Charged at Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3.2:Battery Connection Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3.3:Example of PCB Card Locations in Front of Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3.4:Dipswitch on the Digital Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3.5:Central Exchange Cat. 4601 Card Rack Equipment (96 Station Capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3.6:Central Exchange Cat. 4602 Card Rack Equipment (144 Station Capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3.9:Wiring for EXT equipped Digital Stations Using 4659 EXT Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3.10:AWG Distances for Analog Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3.11:M4 Punch-Down Connecting Blocks in Rear of Cabinet for Digital Station Termination . 3-20
Figure 3.12:4601 Central Exchange Termination Blocks for Digital Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Figure 3.13:Cat. 4602 Central Exchange Termination Blocks for Digital Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Figure 3.16:Terminating Wires to Clips on Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 3.17:M4 100 Pair Connecting Block for Digital Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Figure 3.18:MDF Modem Cross Connect Wire List M4 100 Pair Block for Digital Stations . . . . . . . . 3-25
Figure 3.19:Example of Connections on Rear of Central Exchange to M4 Terminal Blocks
for Digital Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Figure 3.20:4601 Central Exchange Backplane Connections for Digital Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Figure 3.24:Component Rack for Analog Station Wiring (Rear View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Figure 3.25:I/O Board for Analog Station Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Figure 3.26:Station Wire Terminations at J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Figure 3.27:Wire Termination for Analog Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Figure 3.28:Terminating Analog Station Wires on the Central Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Figure 3.29:Digital Station Wiring for Systems with Digital and Analog Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3.30:Analog Exchange Interconnects for 336 Capacity System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3.31:ECHO-RMDS M-Node to M-Node Interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Figure 3.32:Basic ECHO 460 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Figure 3.33:Single Station to Exchange Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Figure 3.34:Exchange to Exchange Connection via Cat. 9754 Modem to Ethernet Interface . . . . . . 3-39
Figure 3.35:Extended Range System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Figure 3.36:4377 Logic Interface to 4378 Relay Interface Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Figure 3.37:Detailed Wiring for E-IST/E-MDS/E-MDSMG to ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card. . . . . . . 3-42
13
Figure 3.38:Detailed Wiring for ECHO-PAI and ECHO-BGM Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Figure 3.39:ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Figure 3.40:Cat. 4324 Remote Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Figure 3.41:Detailed Wiring for ECHO-AIU Audio Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Figure 3.42:Detailed Wiring for Cat. 4327 Elevator Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Equipment
Figure 4.1:ECHO-RMPS Power Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4.2:ECHO-RMCR Card Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4.3:ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4.4:ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4.5:ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4.6:E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4.7:E-MDS/E-MDSMG Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4.8:Programmable Function Keys for E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4.9:4324 Handset Master Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4.10:E-DSM/E-DSMG Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4.11:4321 Master Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4.12:E-IST Wire Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4.13:4319 Dual-Call Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4.14:E-DD1/E-DD2 Wire Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4.15:4213 High-Security Substation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4.16:E-SSSB2 Dual-Call High Security Substation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4.17:E-SSMB1/13 and E-SSSB2 Wire Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4.18:4308 Sentinel Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4.19:4308/09 Wire Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4.20:4362 Wiring Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4.21:ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station Front View.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Figure 4.22:ECHO-ALM Detailed Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4.23:Fiber Optic Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4.24:5265 Direct Select Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Figure 4.25:5265 Control Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4.26:Jack Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4.27:Cat. 4312 Backbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Figure 5.1:Welcome Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5.2:Installation Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5.3:Program Folder Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5.4:Setup Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5.5:Enter Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5.6:Edit Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5.7:Change Application Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5.8:Communications Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Figure 5.9:Main Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5.10:Global Attributes Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5.11:Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5.12:Node Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5.13:Tone Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5.14:Time Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5.15:System Wide Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
14
Figure 5.16:Emergency All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5.17:Active Node Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5.18:Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5.19:Call Abandonment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Figure 5.20:Call Forward No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Figure 5.21:System Clock Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Figure 5.22:Telephone Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Figure 5.23:Admin Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Figure 5.24:Automatic Dialing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Figure 5.25:Factory Defaults/Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5.26:Talk/Listen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5.27:PTT Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5.28:Select Local Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5.29:Local Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Figure 5.30:Node Pair Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 5.31:Extension and Name Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 5.32:Station Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 5.33:Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Figure 5.34:Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5.35:Emergency All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Figure 5.36:Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Figure 5.37:All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Figure 5.38:Single-Digit Speed Dial Master Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Figure 5.39:Single-Digit Speed Dial Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 5.40:Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Figure 5.41:Preempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Figure 5.42:Administrative Master Night Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Figure 5.43:Two-Digit Speed Dial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Figure 5.44:Call Forward No Answer Bin #08 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 5.45:Call Forward No Answer for Standard Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Figure 5.46:Backup/Restore Global Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Figure 5.47:Backup/Restore Local Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Figure 5.48:Diagnostic Choice Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Figure 5.49:No Failed Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Figure 5.50:Failed Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Figure 5.51:Code Version Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Figure 5.52:Configuration Verification Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Figure 5.53:Configuration Verification Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Figure 5.54:Save Configuration Verification Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Figure 5.55:Node Selection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Figure 5.56:Station Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Figure 5.57:IP Component Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Figure 5.58:Code Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5.59:Code Update Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5.60:Code Upload Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5.61:Code Transfer Completed Successfully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5.62:Select Admin Master for Function Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5.63:Main Function Key Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5.64:Drop-Down List of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Figure 5.65:Operating Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Figure 5.66:Group Station Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Figure 5.67:P.A. Page Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Figure 5.68:Call Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Figure 5.69:Select for Global Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
15
Figure 5.70:Global Sentinel Update Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Figure 5.71:Sentinel Advanced Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Figure 5.72:Local Attributes Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Figure 5.73:Select for Local Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Figure 5.74:Enter Sentinel Station Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Figure 5.75:Main Screen Navigation on ECHO-SFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Figure 5.76:Cat. 4550 IP Central Exchange Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Figure 5.77:Station Hub Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Figure 5.78:Connection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5.79:Global and Local Attributes Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5.80:Ring Time Limit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Figure 5.81:Page Time Limit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Figure 5.82:Extension Digits Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Figure 5.83:Emergency All Call Password Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Figure 5.84:Active Node Count Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Figure 5.85:Page Reply Time Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Figure 5.86:Message Tone Interval Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5.87:Call Abandonment Time Interval Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5.88:Call Forward No Answer Time Interval Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5.89:System Clock Range Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Figure 5.90:Extension Digit Errors When Using PBX Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Figure 5.91:Automatic Dialing Keys Entry Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Figure 5.92:Extension Digit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5.93:Sound/Ring Volume Range Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5.94:Partition Range Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5.95:Day/Night Mode Range Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Figure 5.96:Missing Phone Number/Password Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Figure 5.97:Modem Login Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Figure 5.98:Phone Connection Terminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Figure 5.99:Modem/ECHO System Connection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Figure 5.100:Program Code Update Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Figure 5.101:IP Device Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Operation
Figure 7.1:ST1/ST2 Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7.2:Emergency Call Placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
16
Tables
General Description
Table 1.1:Standard Exchange Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Table 1.2:Features Displayed on Full-English LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Table 1.3:Extension Digit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Table 1.4:Standard Call Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Table 1.5:Preempt Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Table 2.1:Node Distribution Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2.2:Power Supply Installation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2.3:General Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 3.1:Cabinet Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3.2:Power Supply Installation Guide for Digital & Analog Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3.3:24V Battery Backup Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Table 3.4:SW and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Table 3.5:Letter Designation Assignment SW #2 and SW # 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Table 3.6:PCB Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Table 3.7:Digital Switch Dipswitch Settings on Cat. 4601 Central Exchange (96 Station Capacity) . . 3-11
Table 3.8:PCB Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3.9:Digital Switch Dipswitch Settings on Cat. 4602 Central Exchange (144 Station Capacity). 3-12
Table 3.10:PCB Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Table 3.11:Digital Switch Dipswitch Settings on Cat. 4603 Central Exchange (240 Station Capacity) 3-14
Table 3.12:PCB Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Table 3.13:Digital Switch Dipswitch Settings on Cat. 4604 Central Exchange (336 Station Capacity) 3-15
Table 3.14:Summary of Dipswitch Settings L Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Table 3.15:Summary of Dipswitch Settings M Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Table 3.16:Summary of Dipswitch Settings N Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Table 3.17:Summary of Dipswitch Settings O Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Table 3.18:AWG Distances for Digital Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Equipment
Table 4.1:460 System Card Handle Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4.2:Programmable Function Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4.3:High-Security Substation Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Table 4.4:Sentinel Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 5.1:Dialing Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Table 5.2:Auto Setup Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Table 5.3:Station Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Table 5.4:Programmable Function Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Table 5.5:Sentinel Sound Detector Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Table 6.1:Keystroke Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6.2:Auto Assigned Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6.3:Directory Text Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
17
Table 6.4:Call Text Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6.5:Button/Master Station Key Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Table 6.6:Specialty Station Extension Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Table 6.7:Auto Dial Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Table 6.8:Text Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Operation
Table 7.1:Single Digit Speed Dial Assignments for Master Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Table 7.2:High-Security Substation Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Table 7.3:Dialing Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Troubleshooting
Table 8.1:Cluster LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8.2:SW #2 and SW # 3 Dipswitch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
18
General Description
.
General Description Central Exchange
Central Exchange
Figure 1.1: Echo 460 Series Central Exchanges
Central Exchange Hardware

Each ECHO Series 460 Central Exchange is housed in a compact two-
section, hinged wall mount cabinet. The front section contains modular racks with
card slots and connectorized backplanes to accept plug-in circuit cards and power
supplies. Pre-wired connecting blocks are provided for field termination of station
lines in the MDF in the rear section of the cabinet.
Central Exchange Technology

The fully digital, microprocessor controlled central exchange employs switched
PCM encoded voice and data for interference-free communications. The system is
capable of digital duplex, hands-free voice communication at both calling and
called party stations, and digital control of all features. Speech channels
throughout the central exchange and transmission lines are completely digital to
and from each call station, and eliminate adjustment prone analog type circuitry
throughout. A single, non-polar, twisted pair, star wiring configuration is used
between the central exchange and each digital call station. A single, twisted
shielded pair wire is used between the central exchange and each analog call
station. Serial data ports allow connection of real time interactive displays such as
computers and programming tools.
The central exchange employs flash memory technology, allowing for future
program upgrades of system features and functions as developed by the
manufacturer to be made remotely via a PC without the need for component
replacement of memory modules.
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation 1-3

Central Exchange General Description
Central Exchange Capacities

Standard Size Exchanges
The Series 4600 Central Exchange is available in four standard sizes.
Total Equipped Non-Blocking

Cat. # Station Capacity
Links* Links*
4601 96 48 30
4602 144 72 30
4603 240 120 30
4604 336 168 30
Table 1.1: Standard Exchange Sizes
* means without conference.
Central Exchange Cabinet Expansion
Expansion to final maximum cabinet capacity is accomplished by means of plug-

in modules including the power supply and does not require the addition of any
other Exchange equipment other than the plug-in modules. Each Central Exchange
has the capability to accept an additional plug-in power supply module to provide
full operating redundancy without changes to cabinet size or configuration.
System Expansion
It is possible to expand beyond cabinet capacity up to a maximum system capacity

of 9072 stations by networking additional cabinets.
1-4 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

General Description Central Exchange Equipment
Central Exchange Equipment

ECHO-RMCR Digital Card Rack
The Digital Card Rack contains twenty card slots and a backplane
assembly with twenty DIN card connectors, two power connectors, two RS-232
serial data ports and four, twenty-five pair connectorized station line cables.
ECHO-RMPS Power Rack

The Power Rack has a power control panel with a primary power and battery
disconnect switches. The rack will accept up to three ECHO-RMPS plug-in power
supply modules. The rack is factory equipped with one supply for each 170
stations. An optional third supply may be ordered for operating redundancy for the
primary supply. The input power to the rack is 85-264V AC @ 47-63 Hz and is
provided through an IEC 60320 connectorized line cord. A built-in battery charger
is provided for external 24V gel-cell batteries. ECHO-RMPS Power Supplies are UL Listed
and CSA, CE certified.
ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card

The Digital Switch Processor Card contains a microprocessor, memory with
system operating instructions, and the digital switch that controls data traffic paths
between nodes and stations. It is equipped with LED diagnostic indicators. The
color coding of its handle is yellow.
ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card

The Modem/Clock Card provides communications and timing control
between system nodes. It also allows remote exchanges to be networked (tie-lined)
using two twisted pairs of a Cat-5 cable or better, fiber modems, or Cat. 9754
Modem to Ethernet Interface. The modem/clock card is equipped with LED
diagnostic indicators, and its handle color is red.
ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card

The Digital Line Card supports eight, single, non-polar twisted pair wire
station lines with access to all available system links and features. The station
range is 1.2Mi. (2 Km.). The handle’s color code is white.
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1-5

Central Exchange Equipment General Description
ECHO-RMCC Conference Card

The Conference Card permits up to ten simultaneous conferences with up to
five members and a maximum of 32 stations. The handle color is green.
ECHO-RMAC Alarm Diagnostic Card

The Alarm Diagnostic Card provides an indicator for system-wide status of
all critical functions. The handle color is blue.
ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module

The Power Supply Module is self-cooled and provides a highly regulated
24Vdc source for powering the central exchange and associated stations. The
Power Supplies are UL Listed and CSA, CE certified.
ECHO-RMRI Digital Voice Recorder Interface

The optional Voice Recorder Interface is an analog interface between the ECHO
460 Digital Intercom Exchange and voice recording equipment supplied
by others. The voice recorder allows any or all conversations within a system to be
recorded. Interface produces DTMF output identification of called and calling
extensions for compatibility with call logging recorders.
ECHO-RTC Real Time Clock

The Real Time Clock is used to time stamp any call activity data that is
transmitted on the digital switch RS-232 port.

General Description Administrative Masters

Using a Windows-based PC, the Echo Administration Program Software allows
system programming via the 460’s RS-232 port.
Administrative Masters
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master
The E-MDS/E-MDSMG is equipped with a coilcord handset for private
communication. The handset and enclosure are made of ash toned thermoplastic,
which is suitable for desk or surface wall mounting. The membrane keypad has 24
buttons: 17 dedicated, and seven programmable. The keypad provides tactile and
audible feedback for positive activation, and is constructed to prevent liquid spills
from damaging internal components. The unit’s LCD features two, 16 character
lines. Its LED indicators are: Routine, Emergency, More Calls and Call Engineer.
There is an audible alert with Tone Silence and Resound. The master’s field wiring
terminal is plug-in, and utilizes two conductors for full-feature capabilities. Also,
the station employs digital signal processors for natural speech quality in difficult
acoustic conditions.
The E-MDSMG features a gooseneck microphone instead of the panel microphone found
in E-MDS.
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1-7E

Master Stations General Description
Master Stations
E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Call Station
The E-DSM/E-DSMG contains an integral handset with a coilcord for private
conversations. Its enclosure and handset are made of ash toned thermoplastic,
which is suitable for desk or surface wall mounting. The E-DSM/E-DSMG also
contains a 2.5 in. panel speaker that is 45 ohm, and comes with an electret
microphone. The keypad is equipped with 16 buttons and provides tactile and
audible feedback for positive activation. The station’s LCD has two, 16 character
lines, and displays the alpha-numeric station status in plain English. Its field
wiring terminal is plug-in, and utilizes two conductors for full-feature capabilities.
Also, the station employs digital signal processors for natural speech quality in
acoustically difficult conditions.
The E-DSM station features a flush membrane keypad.
The E-DSMG is equipped with a gooseneck microphone, and the keypad section is
constructed to prevent liquid spills from damaging internal components.
E-MIST/E-MISM Flush Wall Handset Master Station

The E-MIST/E-MISM features the same controls, display and transducers as the E-DST, but
has an additional anodized aluminum faceplate that permits wall mounting of the
station in backbox E-BB1. The E-MISM Flush Wall Handset has a membrane keypad.

General Description Digital Substations
Digital Substations
E-SSMB1 High Security with Mushroom Button
The E-SSMB1 has the same specifications as the E-SSSB1L except for its being equipped
with a solid metal red mushroom push button.
E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2 High Security Single/Dual Call

The E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2 has an 11ga., (.125in./3mm) thick stainless
steel faceplatewith a brushed finish. It also features a solid metal tamper resistant call
switch (the E-SSSB2 has two call switches), and tamper-proof mounting fasteners. The
E-SSSB1KR is also equipped with a key reset switch. A mylar moisture-resistant 2.5 in.
speaker is shielded from tampering by internal protective plated steel baffles, and
the microphone is enclosed in a right angle, tamper resistant housing. It uses the E-SMB
surface backbox.
E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Dual Call

Equipped with a call-placed LED, call button (E-DD1 one call button, E-DD2 two
call buttons, units are equipped with a relay with heavy duty contacts for remote
control. Each substation call button is capable of calling a specific pre-programmed
station. The faceplate is 0.12in. (3mm) anodized aluminum with a mylar overlay for
flush wall mount or surface mount using E-SMB box.
E-SSSB1KR High Security Call Station

The Federal Signal Cat E-SSSB1KR High-Security Call Station is used in parking
garages, elevators, correctional facilities, institutions, and secured entry ways to provide
single button call with key reset and duplex voice communication.

Analog Substations General Description
ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station

The ECHO-ALM alarm supervision station provides a quick reference for determining if
failures exist on the system. The alarm supervision station is equipped with a
single, bi-color LED indicator to visually annunciate the following:
• System OK (Green LED): The LED will illuminate green to indicate the
system is running properly, and that there are no station or component
failures detected.
• Station Failure (Yellow LED): The LED will illuminate yellow to indicate
that at least one station is failed, and that it is not communicating with the
central exchange.
• Major System Component Failure (Red LED): The LED will illuminate
red to indicate a major component failure (i.e. a broken connection
between central exchanges).
The ECHO-ALM is equipped with a speaker for audible annunciation of alarm conditions.
The speaker on/off condition is controlled by a jumper block at JP1. When the
jumper is in place, the speaker is in the on position. If the jumper is removed, the
speaker is in the off position. While in the on position, the speaker will emit a short
tone, approximately every ten seconds.
The ECHO-ALM is equipped with two relay contacts on the six-position screw terminal at
J4. Relay 1 is associated with the red LED condition. When a condition exists that
causes the red LED to light, Relay 1 is energized. Similarly, Relay 2 is associated
the yellow LED condition. When a condition exists that causes the yellow LED to
illuminate, Relay #2 is energized. The relays are deenergized when the condition is
corrected.
1-10 © 2008 Federal Signal CorporationE

General Description Special Stations and Interfaces
Special Stations and Interfaces

ECHO-PAI Public Page Station
The ECHO-PAI connects to a terminal clip associated with a line card on the exchange. It
is used to interface the exchange with a PA page amplifier through a built-in
isolation transformer. The ECHO-PAI provides relay contacts for muting the background
music channel on the amplifier. Its field wiring terminals are plug-in.
ECHO-BGM Audio Program Distribution Station

The ECHO-BGM connects to a terminal clip associated with a line card on the exchange. It
is used to interface the exchange with an audio program source through a built-in
isolation transformer. Wiring terminations are plug-in.
ECHO-AIU Audio Control

The ECHO-AIU Audio Control Interface connects to a terminal clip associated with a
digital line card to provide an additional input for audio signals. The audio control
interface allows audio from an external device to be distributed to a single station,
stations programmed to receive All Call and Emergency All Call pages, and to
stations in particular groups. The audio control interface is equipped with a single,
red indicator LED that illuminates when the contact is activated to indicate that
audio is being directed to the pre-programmed source.

Analog Substations General Description

The ECHO-ALM alarm supervision station provides a quick reference for determining if
failures exist on the system. The alarm supervision station is equipped with a
single, bi-color LED indicator to visually annunciate the following:
• System OK (Green LED): The LED will illuminate green to indicate the
system is running properly, and that there are no station or component
failures detected.
• Station Failure (Yellow LED): The LED will illuminate yellow to indicate
that at least one station is failed, and that it is not communicating with the
central exchange.
• Major System Component Failure (Red LED): The LED will illuminate
red to indicate a major component failure (i.e. a broken connection
between central exchanges).
The ECHO-ALM is equipped with a speaker for audible annunciation of alarm conditions.
The speaker on/off condition is controlled by a jumper block at JP1. When the
jumper is in place, the speaker is in the on position. If the jumper is removed, the
speaker is in the off position. While in the on position, the speaker will emit a short
tone, approximately every ten seconds.
The ECHO-ALM is equipped with two relay contacts on the six-position screw terminal at
J4. Relay 1 is associated with the red LED condition. When a condition exists that
causes the red LED to light, Relay 1 is energized. Similarly, Relay 2 is associated
the yellow LED condition. When a condition exists that causes the yellow LED to
illuminate, Relay #2 is energized. The relays are deenergized when the condition is
corrected.
1-10 © 2008 Federal Signal CorporationE

General Description
E-SMB High Security Surface Mount Backbox

The E-SMB High Security Surface Mount Backbox is constructed of 0.060 steel with
a white mar-resistant baked epoxy finish. It is for use with the following:
• E-SSMB1 High-Security Single-Call Substation with Mushroom Button

• E-SSSB1L High-Security Single-Call Substation
• E-SSSB1KR High-Security Single-Call Substation with Key Reset
• E-SSSB2 High-Security Dual-Call Substation
X-9867 Surface Wall Bracket

The X-9867 Surface Wall Bracket is used to wall-mount the following stations:
• E-DSM Handset Masters

• E-MDS Administrative Master
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1-15E

Operational Features General Description
Operational Features
Master Stations
Master stations have a complete 16 key dialing keypad and a 2-line by 16 character
LCD display.
Admin Call
Administrative masters have the capacity to store multiple simultaneous admin

type substation calls. It is possible to display and answer Admin type calls without
using the numeric touchpad or losing calls. It is possible to display up to ten levels
of substation call priority. The LCD display provides an active call count display
of up to ten stored calls. If more calls are waiting to be answered, the more calls
LED will illuminate. Multiple masters are capable of receiving admin calls from
the same substation. Masters are capable of operating in a parallel or independent
mode or receive admin calls from all substations.
Administrative Master
The E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Masters can place and receive calls and
have all the same features as a conventional master. Up to eight administrative masters
can be associated to a digital switch (“L” Node). If night mode is disabled, additional
admin masters may be added in parallel ownership to any or all of the eight.
In addition to the basic master keypad, the administrative master station has eight
additional keys, seven of which are capable of being programmed to provide one-
touch selection of standard functions. The eighth key is dedicated to Tone Silence.
Handset Operation
A handset with coilcord is provided for private conversations on handset stations.

When the handset is lifted off-hook the panel speaker and microphone are
disconnected and the handset is enabled. Calls between handset stations are full
duplex. It is possible to use the keypad with the handset on or off-hook.

General Description Operational Features
LCD Display
Each master station has the capability to provide full-English phrase LCD display
of feature-in-progress including:
Features Displayed on Master Station Full-English LCD

Ringing Busy Hold
Transfer Conference All Call
Group Call Page Reply Prompt Message Waiting
Camp-on Busy Called Party Name/ID Calling Party Name/ID
Help Menu Name/Number Directory Call Forward
Volume Level (0-9)
Table 1.2: Features Displayed on Full-English LCD
LED Indicators
LED indicators are provided to indicate the status of Admin type calls on E-MDS/E-MDSMG
and 4324 master stations. LEDs are provided to display call status (Routine and
Emergency), alert that there are multiple calls on the system (More Calls) and for
diagnostics (Diagnostic).
Name Directory
Each master station has the capability to display a unique directory of up to 20

frequently called extension numbers and names using a single key both to scroll,
and to dial displayed extensions.
Placing a Call
Master stations are capable of calling any other station in the system by touch
dialing an extension number. When the calling party enters the extension, the
digits and called party directory name display on the integral LCD display of the
station. At the called party station, the number and directory name of the calling
party shall be displayed. After connecting, hands-free communication may begin
and both parties may converse naturally without pressing any buttons. Calls may
be cancelled by either party by pressing the X button, or by going on-hook.
Incompletely dialed calls will time-out in five seconds.
Programming
The system configuration for all stations may be programmed from a master
station or a PC using the ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software without
interruption to other calls in progress or control functions.

Remote Control
It is possible to remotely control relays on substations where ancillary devices

such as door releases, bells, lights or CCTV cameras may be activated by
connecting to the station and dialing a single digit.
Volume Control
The volume for both voice and ring signal are independently adjusted by means of
digital volume keys on the station keypad. The keypad volume keys control the
volume for handset and hands-free operation.
Substations
Each substation call button places a call to a pre-programmed destination. It is
possible to program any number of substations to call the same master station.
Multi-button substations can place calls to several pre-programmed destinations.
Call destination and volume is set in program mode. Substations have the
capability to be programmed to place two types of calls, standard and admin.
Miscellaneous
Adaptable Extension Numbering
The station numbering plan is adaptable. Station extensions may be assigned two,
three, or four-digit numbers and will not affect wiring or physical installation. The
selection is made in global attributes using either ECHO-SFW Administration Program
Software, or by entering the installer mode programming from a master station.
The number of extension digits is programmable in global attributes under system
wide extensions. Each station must be assigned a unique extension number. Two,
three, and four-digit extensions can be assigned according to the table below:
# of Extension Digits Extension Assignment Range

Two-Digit 10–99
Three-Digit 100–999
Four-Digit 1000–9999
Table 1.3: Extension Digit Assignments
Busy Indication
An LCD screen will display BUSY when a called station or link is in use. This is
also displayed when called station is in Do Not Disturb mode.

General Description Operational Features
Computer Graphical User Interface (GUI)
It is possible to transfer bi-directional serial data between the central exchange and
a PC computer workstation or PLC. The PC workstation or PLC touchscreen
functions in parallel with a dedicated master.
Failed Station Detection
Calls to a station with failed wiring or equipment will display as FAILED on a

master LCD.
Hands-Free, Two-Way Loudspeaking
Calls may be established in the two-way hands-free loudspeaking mode.
Invalid Extension Detection
Calls to extensions that are not configured will display the called extension
number for four seconds before returning to idle.
Limits, Time-Out
Time-out limits can be set for automatic cancellation of functions such as an All
Call page.
Partitions
The exchange has 99 partitions. Stations in the same partition can communicate
with each other. Communication between stations in different partitions is
blocked. A station may be programmed to belong to any one of 99 partitions or
partition 0. A station in partition 0 may communicate with any partition. Partition
0 is usually reserved for an attendant position.
Pre-Announce Tone
Pre-announce tones sound at stations to indicate connection. Pre-announce tones

are activated/deactivated through global programming.
Privacy
Stations may be preset to any of four modes of privacy for receiving calls. Stations
in non-private (automatic loudspeaking answer) and semi-private (manual answer)
mode both receive a preannounce tone and automatically connect when called; a
manual answer station microphone is muted until answered by keying T or going
off-hook. Stations in Full Privacy (ring) mode receive a ring tone and are
answered by pressing T or going off-hook. Stations in Do Not Disturb mode
appear busy to the calling party.

Private Conversation
Stations equipped with handsets may converse in full duplex, for privacy or in
noisy areas.
RS-232 Serial Port
Call placed, connect, quit, and busy events are output in ASCII format, including
source and destination extension numbers. The optional ECHO-RTC Real Time Clock
provides date and time stamping of each event. A serial printer may be connected
to produce hard copies. A video display terminal (VDT) may be connected and
used to display exchange activity in real-time.
Restricted Access
Access to certain system functions such as Priority Break-In, All-Call paging, and
others can be limited to specific stations.
Standard Calls
Substation buttons programmed as standard place calls to masters or substations,

and are processed in the same manner as a call from a master station.
Substation buttons programmed as admin, place calls to administrative masters
where they are stacked, allowing multiple substations to place simultaneous calls
to the same master without receiving busy signals or getting lost. Substation
buttons set as admin are capable of being programmed to place either routine or
emergency level calls with selectable locking or non-locking status. Admin calls
are capable of being assigned any of ten programmed text messages and are
capable of reporting to multiple masters.

General Description Call Types
Call Types
The ECHO 460 Intercom System is capable of placing two distinctive types of
calls, admin and standard.
Admin Calls
Admin calls are placed by substations only. Admin calls are automatically queued
on the system according to the time placed and priority level.
Admin calls have the following attributes:
• Admin calls are queued

• Admin calls are prioritized
• Call text is programmable
• Admin calls can be answered out of priority by scrolling or direct selection
• Admin calls can be placed from a single station to multiple administrative
masters
• Admin calls can be locking or non-locking
Locking Calls
Locking calls must be cancelled at the originating station. Call types #1, 3, 5, 7 and
9 on the ECHO system are locking calls.
Non-Locking Calls
Non-locking calls are cancelled at the master station. Call types #0, 2, 4, 6, and 8
on the ECHO system are non-locking calls and are cancellable at the master
station.
Prioritization
Admin calls are prioritized according to the priority level of the call, and the time
the call was placed. Emergency level calls take priority over routine level calls,
regardless of the time they were placed on the system.
Programmed Priority Level

Admin calls can be assigned as routine or emergency. There are five levels for
both routine and emergency calls. Priority levels for calls placed by substations are
established through Local Programming.
Time Placed
Admin calls are automatically queued by the system. Calls of the same priority
level are queued according to the time they are placed. When two or more calls of
the same priority level are all queued on the system, the first call placed will be the
first call answered if the attendant is auto answering calls.

Call Types General Description
Standard Calls
Standard calls are placed by master stations and have the following attributes:
• Standard calls are given the highest level of priority.

• Standard calls are not held in queue, but when a substation calls and
receives a busy signal, the call will automatically camp on, resulting in the
master station immediately connecting to the substation once the previous
call is cancelled.
• Standard calls do not activate call priority LEDs on the master station.
• Standard calls connect to the station automatically, depending on the
privacy settings of the station they are calling.
Privacy Setting Standard Call Connection

Non-Private The call is instantly connected
The connection is made, but called station’s microphone
Semi-Private is muted until the Talk button is pressed or user goes off
hook.
The station rings to indicate the call. The called station
Full-Private microphone is muted until the Talk button is pressed or
the user goes off hook.
The LCD display of the calling station indicates that the
Do Not Disturb
called station is busy.
Table 1.4: Standard Call Connection
Busy Stations
If attempting to place a standard call to a busy station, the LCD at the calling
station will read BUSY. Upon seeing that the called station is busy, the calling
party has the following available options:
• Press 7 to leave a message with a busy station

• Press 5 to camp on (substation-to-master calls will automatically camp on)
• Press T to pre-empt that station
Leaving a Message
Pressing 7 will leave a message at the busy station. The message will inform the
called party of the call attempt and will leave the extension of the party that left the
message. The user at the station where the message is displayed can press the Talk
button to connect to the party that left the message.

General Description Call Types
Camp On
If the called party is busy when a standard call is placed, the calling party can press
5 to camp-on to that line. A message will appear on the LCD of the called party
alerting of the camped-on call. When the called station is available, the camped-on
call will be connected automatically. Camped-on calls are prioritized according to
the time they are placed.
Preempt
The Preempt feature allows one station to break in to a busy station (see Figure 1.2
on page 1-24). To preempt a busy station, the calling party will press the Talk key.
Individual stations must be programmed with one of the pre-empt settings listed in
the table below:
Preempt Setting Description

Disabled Preempt feature is disabled
A station set to inbound only can be preempted by
Inbound Only
another authorized. It cannot preempt other stations.
A station set to outbound only is allowed to pre-empt
Outbound Only
stations set to inbound. It cannot be preempted.
Inbound & A station set to inbound & outbound can preempt other
Outbound stations. It can be preempted by another station.
Table 1.5: Preempt Settings
The preempt setting on the station will determine whether it can be preempted or
preempt another station.
Prioritization
Standard calls are given the highest level of priority. They supersede all admin
calls, regardless of the priority level assigned to a particular admin call. If admin
calls are currently held in queue by the system and a standard call is placed, the
admin calls will remain in the queue and the standard call will be answered ahead
of them.

Call Types General Description
1. Stations 11 & 12 are connected.

2. Station 10 places a standard call to station 11.
3. The LCD at station 10 reads “BUSY 11”.
4. The operator at station 10 presses the Talk key
to pre-empt the connection between 11 & 12.
1. Station 12 is placed on hold.

2. Stations 10 and 11 are connected.
1. Station 10 disconnects.
2. The connection between 11 and 12 is
reestablished automatically.
Figure 1.2: Pre-Empt Operation

.
Exchange Architecture Exchange Architecture
Exchange Architecture
The ECHO Series 460 Central Exchange utilizes an architecture consisting of
modular units or nodes, which permit exchange cabinets to be easily networked
(tie-lined). No additional equipment is required to network remotely located
exchange cabinets in certain configurations.
Each station is connected to the central exchange by a single, twisted pair of wires
in the star wiring configuration.
The capacity of the Series 460 Digital Central Exchange is expandable from eight
to 336 stations. Multiple exchanges may be interconnected for a maximum
capacity of 9072 stations.
Centralized and Distributed Exchange Cabinets

A centralized exchange has sufficient capacity to serve all stations, and all
exchange equipment is located in the same room or closet. All station wiring is
returned to this single location for termination.
A distributed exchange is used when buildings, which must communicate with
each other, are separated by substantial distances. A smaller capacity exchange is
located in each building and station wiring is returned to the exchange within each
building. Since interwiring between exchanges requires only two twisted pairs of a
Cat-5 cable or better, or fiber optic modems, overall system wiring requirements
may be reduced.
Central Exchange Nodes

Each central exchange is made up of modules called nodes. These nodes
communicate with each other by means of a modem card located in each node.
The nodes that constitute a central exchange are not required to be in the same
cabinet, as each node contains a modem card allowing the nodes to be separated.
L Nodes
Nodes that contain line cards are called L nodes. L nodes have a capacity of up to
six line cards, or 48 station lines. Each L node also contains one digital switch card
and one modem card. L nodes are numbered L001 through L189.
L Node Link
If the originating and destination extensions of stations attempting simultaneous

calls are contained within an L node, the calls will be non-blocking for all 48
stations within the same L node.

Exchange Architecture Exchange Architecture
Networking L Nodes
The expansion of line capacity in a ECHO Series 460 Central Exchange is

accomplished by networking L nodes. When an exchange contains two or more L
nodes, the nodes communicate through their modem cards. Two L nodes may be
connected with no additional equipment for a capacity of up to 96 stations. If the
originating and destination extension of stations are each in different L nodes, up
to 30 simultaneous calls may be placed between L nodes. A two L node exchange
would be completely non-blocking if each L node were equipped with a maximum
of 30 stations each, thus reducing the maximum capacity from 96 to 60 stations.
M Nodes
An exchange with three or more L nodes requires an additional node for

networking. This additional node is called an M node. Calls between L nodes are
routed through the M node. The M node contains one digital switch card, one
modem card, and an additional modem card for each connected L node. M nodes
are numbered M001 thorough M027. In a single M node exchange (336 station
capacity), the M node is called the “top node”. An exchange with an M node can
network up to seven L nodes that contain as many as 336 stations. Up to 30 calls
may be routed from each L node through an M node. A seven L node exchange
would be completely non-blocking if each L node were equipped with the
maximum of 30 stations each, thus reducing the maximum capacity from 336 to
210 stations.
Networking M Nodes
Two M node exchange cabinets may be networked with no additional equipment

for a system capacity of up to 672 station lines.
N & O Nodes
When an exchange contains more than two M nodes, they must be networked
using an N node. A single N node exchange supports a system capacity of 2352
station lines. Two N nodes may be networked with no additional equipment. An
exchange, which contains more than two N nodes is networked by using an O
node, which raises the maximum capacity of the system to 9072 station lines.

Exchange Architecture Determining Power Supplies
Node Summary
The following table is a summary of node distribution in the four basic ECHO
Series 4600 Central Exchange cabinets:
Cat. No. Capacity No. No. of L Nodes No. of M Nodes

4601 96 2 0
4602 144 3 1
4603 240 5 1
4604 336 7 1
Table 2.1: Node Distribution Figures
Determining Power Supplies

The size of the exchange determines the number of power supply modules
required for each exchange cabinet.
Equipped # of ECHO-RMPS
Cat. #
Capacity Supplies
4601 96 one
4602 144 one
4603 240 two
4604 336 two
Table 2.2: Power Supply Installation Guide
General Wiring Requirements

Each digital station is wired directly to a clip terminal on the punch block
associated with the Digital Line Card on the Central Exchange. Each analog
station is wired directly to a screw terminal block on the rear of the Central
Exchange component rack. Basic wiring requirements are listed in the table below.
Refer to “Digital Station Wiring” on page 3-19 and to “Analog Station Wiring” on
page 3-31 for detailed wiring information.
Do not run system wiring for analog substations in common conduit or in close
proximity (12 inches minimum) with wiring for other systems. (AC power
distribution, fire alarm, entertainment or P.A. systems, etc.)

General Wiring Requirements Exchange Architecture
From Central Exchange to Wire Description Maximum Length

2000 ft, 24 AWG
One twisted pair
Digital Stations 4500 ft, 22 AWG
non-polar
6336 ft, 20 AWG
One shielded twisted
Analog Stations 1000 ft, 22 AWG
pair
Table 2.3: General Wiring Requirements

Exchange Architecture Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams
Figure 2.1: Diagram for Systems with Up to 672 Capacity

Block Diagrams Exchange Architecture
Figure 2.2: System with a 2352Capacity

Exchange Architecture Block Diagrams
Figure 2.3: System with a 9072 Capacity
© 2008Federal Signal Corporation. 2-9

Block Diagrams Exchange Architecture

.
Installation & Wiring Central Exchange Installation
Central Exchange Installation

Locating the Central Exchange Cabinet
The ECHO Series 460 Digital Central Exchange, like most electronic office
equipment, should be protected from harsh environmental conditions. To assure
reliable operation and easy servicing, several factors should be considered when
planning the installation. After completing a site survey but before installing the
Central Exchange and wiring consider the following:
1. The central exchange is designed for wall mounting on a backboard.

2. The power supply operates on 85-264V ac, 47-63 Hz service. A 3-wire (single
phase with ground) receptacle must be provided within three feet of the
location of the exchange on a dedicated, separately fused 15 ampere circuit.
3. Locate the exchange midway between all stations in the system, if possible, to
reduce wire runs.
4. A well ventilated area having a recommended temperature range of 70 to 78ºF
(21-26ºC) and humidity range of 5 to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing)
measured 5ft. (1.5m) above floor level.
5. Adequate lighting and accessibility for servicing.
6. Protection from flooding, flammable materials, excessive dust and vibration.
7. Away from arc welding, high power transmitting equipment or other electrical
equipment capable of generating electrical interference.
8. Access to a good earth ground per ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 such as a cold water
pipe.
9. Specify how station cable will be routed and managed in the location of the
central exchange.
Any exchange wiring extending outside of the building should be equipped with
primary and secondary protection devices because of possible exposure to
lightning transients. This type of protection equipment is available through
telephone equipment supply houses.
Unpacking the Exchange and Component Parts

1. Remove the Central Exchange from the shipping carton and stand it upright on
a level working surface with the glazed door facing forward.
2. Remove all remaining items from their packing boxes and inspect for shipping
damage.
Cabinet Installation
The cabinet is designed for wall mounting only on a properly sized piece of
minimum 3/4 inch plywood or pressed board. The wooden back board must be
anchored to the wall using adequately sized toggle bolts or lead anchors with lag
bolts. The full-sized cabinet template (furnished with each cabinet) should be
leveled and attached to the back board to identify the corner screw hole locations.

Central Exchange Installation Installation & Wiring
1. Remove template and insert four # 10 or larger wood screws into the
backboard at the marked corner locations.
2. Lift the Central Exchange and place it onto the screws. When the exchange is
in position, the screws can be tightened. Add two additional screws in the
center top and bottom holes.
System Grounding
1. Hinge open the front section of the cabinet and attach a # 8 ga. copper wire
between the threaded ground lug on the inside lower left panel of the cabinet
(as viewed from the rear), through the removable panel on the bottom of the
rear section, to a reliable building ground point such as Telco ground or cold
water pipe.
2. Dress the wire to the hinge side of the cabinet and leave sufficient service loop
in wire so front section of cabinet may be completely opened.
HxWxD Weight
Cat.
Inches (cm) lbs (kg)
4601 20 x 24 x 20 (50 x 60 x 50) 94 (43)
4602 20 x 24 x 20 (50 x 60 x 50) 104 (47)
4603 25 x 24 x 20 (63 x 60 x 50) 128 (58)
4604 30 x 24 x 20 (76 x 60 x 50) 172 (78)
Table 3.1: Cabinet Enclosure Dimensions
ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Installation

The size of the exchange determines the number of power supply modules
required for each exchange cabinet.
Equipped # of ECHO-RMPS
Cat. #
Capacity Supplies
4601 96 one
4602 144 one
4603 240 two
4604 336 two
Table 3.2: Power Supply Installation Guide for Digital & Analog Stations
WARNING: Do not connect the AC power cord to an AC outlet at this time.

1. Locate the power rack at the bottom of the exchange cabinet.

2. Set both the AC power switch and battery switch to the Off position.
3. Install each power supply in the power rack by sliding them into their
respective mounting slots PS 1, 2 & 3 until the front of the supply is flush with
the front of the rack assuring that the connector is completely seated.
4. Install the first supply in PS 1, the right most slot.
5. If the second supply is used, remove the blank cover plate and install the
second supply in PS 2, the center slot.
6. The left slot, PS 3 may be used for an optional operating backup supply.
Optional Battery Backup Installation

Battery backup option can be installed to maintain operation during loss of
primary AC power.
Battery Charger
The power rack is equipped with a float type battery charger as a standard feature.
The charger provides a constant voltage output of 27.3V +/- .3V.
External Batteries
A separate external 24V battery (two 12V batteries) and enclosure must be
provided by others.
WARNING: Do not make connections to external batteries with AC power applied.

Verify that the battery power switch is turned Off.
Exchange Capacity
Battery 20 Hr. Amp-
Hour Rating
96 144 240 336
8 1.7 Hr. 1.2 Hr. .6 Hr. .4 Hr.
18 5 Hr. 4 Hr. 1.7 Hr. 1.2 Hr.
40 13 Hr. 8Hr. 4 Hr. 3 Hr.
Table 3.3: 24V Battery Backup Duration
1. Batteries should be of the sealed gel-cell type as manufactured by Powersonic,

Yuasa or equal.
2. A battery rack or case should be used to secure and protect the batteries.
3. Use the shortest length of stranded wire possible to connect the batteries. Use
wire sizes recommended by NEC or local codes.
4. The batteries must be fully charged at installation.

Central Exchange Installation Installation & Wiring
5. The two 12V batteries must be connected in series for a final voltage of 24V.
6. The battery recharge time will vary between 12 to 72 hours, according to the
size of the battery and the depth of discharge.
Mount Enclosure and Install Batteries
1. External batteries may now be connected to J11 (+) and J12 (-) using crimp
type ring terminals and stranded wire. Observe polarity.
2. Install battery cables through removable bottom panel in rear section of
cabinet.
3. Dress cables to hinge side and provide sufficient service loop to allow front
section to hinge open.
4. The power rack backplane is equipped with a 20A battery fuse labeled F1.
Figure 3.1: Batteries Charged at Installation

Figure 3.2: Battery Connection Block Diagram

PCB Installation Installation & Wiring
PCB Installation
Electro Static Discharge (ESD)
Safety Precautions
PCBs are susceptible to damage due to ESD.
1. Before handling PCBs wear a grounded wrist strap or discharge yourself by

touching the grounded cabinet, which will minimize the possibility of damage
due to ESD.
2. Keep all PCBs in their protective anti-static bags until they are ready to be
installed.
3. PCBs that are not in anti-static bags should be handled by the card edges only.
Do not lay unprotected PCBs on a carpeted surface.
Inserting PCBs
When inserting a card into the exchange, make sure the card edges are aligned with
the card guides and the component side of the card faces to the right.
PCB Card Locations

The card handles are color coded to match designators on the top of each card rack.
Start with rack 1A (upper left rack facing front of rack) and continue with 1B , 2A
etc. Rack 2B is always reserved for the “M” node (modem). Insert each card type
in its corresponding card slot. Make sure the cards are properly seated in their
respective card connectors. Refer to Figure 3.5 on page 3-11, Figure 3.6 on page 3
12, Figure 3.7 on page 3-13, and Figure 3.8 on page 3-14 for PCB card locations.
1A 1B
2B
2A
Figure 3.3: Example of PCB Card Locations in Front of Cabinet

Installation & Wiring PCB Installation
Setting Dipswitches on Digital Switch (DS) Cards

The dipswitch settings for each node type are shown in Table 3.7 on page 3-11,
Table 3.9 on page 3-12, Table 3.11 on page 3-14, Table 3.13 on page 3-15, and
the Dipswitch Summary on page 3-15. After inserting the DS cards, it is necessary
to set dipswitches 1 through 7 on each DS card.
Figure 3.4: Dipswitch on the Digital Switch
SW # 2. and SW # 3. Node Type Selection
Each node in the system must be assigned a letter designation. Refer to Table 3.5
on page 3-11.
SW # 2 and SW # 3 on a Digital Switch card determine the letter designation “L”,
“M”, “N” or “O” of the node that the DS card is plugged into. Set SW # 2 and SW
# 3 of each DS card for the system being installed by using the node designations
displayed in the Rack-Node table of Figures of 4.3 - 4.6.
Dipswitch 1 - 7
SW Off On
1 Standard Node Top Node
2 See table 4.5 See Table 4.5
3 See table 4.5 See table 4.5
4 Normal Code Default Code
5 Normal Initialize Node
6 N/U N/U
7 Normal Diagnostic
Table 3.4: SW and Functions

Node Type sw2 sw3

L Off Off
M On Off
N Off On
O On On
Table 3.5: Letter Designation Assignment SW #2 and SW # 3
SW # 1. Standard and Top Node Selection
In every exchange there must only be one DS card with SW# 1 set to TOP NODE.
All other DS cards in the system have SW# 1 set for STANDARD.
The diagrams on Figure 2.1 on page 2-5 identify the top node location for all
systems. Match the capacity of the system being installed to the appropriate
diagram to determine the top node ID. Identify the location of the top node DS in
the system being installed and set the dipswitch SW# 1 on that DS card to TOP
NODE position. Set SW# 1 on all other DS cards to STANDARD.
SW # 4. Normal Code and Default Code Selection
Select NORMAL CODE position for all DS cards. DEFAULT CODE position is
used for maintenance purposes.
SW # 5. Normal and Initialize Node
Select NORMAL position for all DS cards. INITIALIZE NODE position is used
for maintenance purposes.
SW # 6. is not used
Place in Off position
SW # 7. Normal and Diagnostic Selection
Select NORMAL for all DS cards. DIAGNOSTIC position is used for

maintenance purposes.

Cat. 4601 Central Exchange 96 Station Capacity
Refer to the end of the section for detailed diagrams.
L001 - 1A L002-1B
LC M DS LC M DS
PS
Figure 3.5: Central Exchange Cat. 4601 Card Rack Equipment (96 Station
Capacity)
Legend
LC Line Card (slots 1 - 6)
DS Digital Switch (slot 9)
M Modem (slot 8)
A Alarm (slot 10) optional
PS Power Supply
Table 3.6: PCB Abbreviations
L001 - 1A L002 - 1B
SW Position Position
1 On Off
2 Off Off
3 Off Off
4 Off Off
5 Off Off
6 Off Off
7 Off Off
Table 3.7: Digital Switch Dipswitch Settings on Cat. 4601 Central Exchange (96
Station Capacity)

L001 - 1A L002-1B
LC M DS LC M DS
A
Modem Digtal Switch
L003 - 2A LC M DS MM M M DS M001-2B
PS1
Capacity)
Legend
LC Line Card (slot 1-6)
M Modem (slot 8, 1-3)

C Conference (optional) (slot 10)
A Alarm (slot 10)
PS Power Supply
L001 - 1A L002 - 1B L003 - 2A M001 - 2B

SW
1 Off Off Off On
2 Off Off Off On
3 Off Off Off Off
4 Off Off Off Off
5 Off Off Off Off
6 Off Off Off Off
7 Off Off Off Off
Table 3.9: Digital Switch Dipswitch Settings on Cat. 4602 Central Exchange
(144 Station Capacity)

C
L001 - 1A L002-1B
LC
LC DS
MM DS LC LC M DS
M DS
Modem Digtal Switch

A
L003 - 2A LC M DS M M M M DS M001-2B
LC M DS M M M M M M DS
PS1
L004 - 3A L005 - 3B
LC M DS LC M DS
PS2 PS1
Capacity)
Legend
M Modem (slot 8)
A Alarm (slot 10)
PS Power Supply
L001 - 1A L002 - 1B L003 - 2A M001 - 2B L004 - 3A L005 - 3B

SW
1 Off Off Off On Off Off
3 Off Off Off Off Off Off

L001 - 1A L002 - 1B L003 - 2A M001 - 2B L004 - 3A L005 - 3B

SW

C
LC
LC DS
MM DS LC LC M DS
M DS
L001 - 1A LC MDS LC MDS L002-1B
Modem Digtal Switch

A
L003 - 2A LC M DS M M M M DS M001-2B
LCLC MDS
M DS M MMMMMMMMMMMDS
M DS
PS1
LC
L005 - 3B
L004 - 3A LC MDS
MDS
LC M DS LC M DS
L006 - 4A L007 - 4B
PS2 PS1
LC MDS LC MDS
PS2 PS1
Capacity)
Legend
M Modem (slot 8)
A Alarm (slot 10)

PS Power Supply

L001 - 1A L002 - 1B L003 - 2A M001 - 2B L004 - 3A L005 - 3B

SW
L006 - 4A L007 - 4B
SW
1 Off Off
2 Off Off
3 Off Off
4 Off Off
5 Off Off
6 Off Off
7 Off Off
Dipswitch Settings Summary

Refer to Figure 2.1 on page 2-7, Figure 2.2 on page 2-8, and Figure 2.3 on page 2
9 for system architecture.
L Node ‘Top Node’ 48 or 96

L Node
SW Capacity Only
Position Position
1 On Off
2 Off Off
3 Off Off
4 Off Off
5 Off Off
6 Off Off
Table 3.14: Summary of Dipswitch Settings L Node

L Node ‘Top Node’ 48 or 96

L Node
SW Capacity Only
Position Position
7 Off Off
Table 3.14: Summary of Dipswitch Settings L Node
M Node ‘Top Node’ M Node

SW
Position Position
1 On Off
2 On On
3 Off Off
4 Off Off
5 Off Off
6 Off Off
7 Off Off
Table 3.15: Summary of Dipswitch Settings M Node
N Node ‘Top Node’ N Node

SW
Position Position
1 On Off
2 Off Off
3 On On
4 Off Off
5 Off Off
6 Off Off
7 Off Off
Table 3.16: Summary of Dipswitch Settings N Node
O Node ‘Top Node’

SW
Position
1 On
2 On
3 On
4 Off
5 Off
6 Off
7 Off
Table 3.17: Summary of Dipswitch Settings O Node

Installation & Wiring System Wiring
System Wiring
Refer to “Equipment” section for information on specific equipment field
termination.
Digital Station Wire and Cable Specifications

1. One twisted pair, non-shielded cable per line.
2. Maximum attenuation per line 24dB @ 160kb/s
3. Maximum loop resistance is 170 Ohms
4. Range: 1.2mi. (6336 ft.) with -EXT option 2.4mi. (4km)
5. Levels: AC- 1.2Vpp; DC- 28Vdc
6. Format: (2B+D) compatible to ISDN basic rate
7. Line code: Biphase with differential encoding
8. Use the Table below to determine minimum AWG gauge
AWG Max. Distance

24 2000 ft.
22 4500 ft.
20 6336 ft.
Table 3.18: AWG Distances for Digital Stations
AWG Max. Distance

24 12,672 ft. (4000m)
Figure 3.9: Wiring for EXT equipped Digital Stations Using 4659 EXT Line
Card
9. Use twisted pair, non-shielded (UTP) telephone cable Category 3 Compliant or

greater such as General Cable Multi-pair Inside Wire or equal.
Analog Station Wire and Cable Specifications

1. One twisted pair, shielded cable per line.
2. Range: 1000ft.
3. Operating Voltage: 28 VDC
4. Audio Power, Intercom, All-Call Paging:
8, 1-watt channels
8 Watts per 4656 Line Card
5. Frequency Response: 150 Hz to 12,000 Hz
6. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 5% at rated output
7. S/N Ratio: Greater than 60dB at rated output

System Wiring Installation & Wiring
8. Use Table below for AWG details.
AWG Max. Distance

22 1,000 ft. (304.8m)
Figure 3.10: AWG Distances for Analog Stations
Do not run system wiring for analog substations in common conduit or in close
proximity (12 inches minimum) with wiring for other systems. (AC power
distribution, fire alarm, entertainment or P.A. systems, etc.)
Exchange Cable Installation Specifications

1. A maximum of one station may be connected to a Line Card Output. Multiple
stations may not be paralleled on the same extension line.
2. Bridged taps are not allowed. (Multiple appearances of the same cable pair at
several distribution points, also known as parallel connections or unused tapoff
connections.) Use one continuous cable. Bridge taps are most commonly
encountered with existing wiring.
3. Splices are not recommended. Keep to a minimum where required.
4. Pair twists should be maintained as close as possible to the point of termination
and untwisting should not exceed 2 in.
5. System wiring should be isolated from high levels of interference or noise.
6. All system wiring should be electrically isolated from earth/ building ground
except for the building ground conductor on the cabinet ground and the power
entry cable.
7. Component and cable installation procedures are subject to Factory Wiring
Requirements, N.E.C. and Local Codes of the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
Cat-5 Cable Digital Switch Interconnect
Two twisted pairs of a Cat-5 cable or better. Maximum distance 2000 feet (609m).
Refer to wiring diagrams starting on page 3-37. Refer to “Exchange Cable
Installation Specifications” numbers 2 & 4 above.
Fiber Optic Digital Switch Interconnection
Fiber optic interconnection of two 4600 L Nodes may be accomplished with no

additional exchange equipment. The fiber link uses two International Fiber
Systems modems Series D1200 or equal (supporting G.703) for distances of up to
46 miles (75km). Refer to Figure 3.32 on page 3-37.

Fiber Optic Connection of a Single Station to the Central Exchange
A single station can be connected to the central exchange line via fiber-optic cable.
The Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface provides connection between a ECHO
station and the International Fiber Systems Modem Series D1000, or equal, to
achieve distances of up to 30 miles (49 km). Figure 3.33 on page 3-38 illustrates
fiber optic connection from a single station to the Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface.
Protection for Off-Premise Wiring
The metallic field wiring connections between the 4600 Series Central Exchange
and any ECHO intercom station are intended to be made on-premise with both
central exchange and its associated station(s) located within the same building.
When wiring extends outside the building in which the central exchange is
installed, the wiring must be protected from direct or indirect contact with
lightning, power lines or electrostatic discharge to protect equipment and
personnel.
Primary and secondary devices should be installed at the station and central
equipment sides to divert the surge energy to ground. Most large telephone
equipment supply distributors carry appropriate protection solutions. Surge
voltages should be clamped to less than 50 volts.
Alternately, ECHO intercom equipment may be interfaced with fiber optic lines
which offer immunity to off-premise hazards. See wiring diagram Figure 3.32 on
page 3-37 and Figure 3.33 on page 3-38.
Digital Station Wiring

Central Exchange MDF Station Pair Connections
MDF Blocks for Digital Stations

Each half section of a card rack, or node, is equipped with two 25 pair amphenol
type connectors, which are factory cabled to the 100 pair M4 type industry
standard punch-down connecting blocks located inside the rear section of the
cabinet (MDF) and associated with the digital line cards. Refer to Figure 3.11 on
page 3-20. Each M4 block has the capacity to handle two nodes with up to 96
stations with two clips dedicated to each digital station. Each of the four basic
exchange cabinet types are factory equipped with sufficient M4 blocks in the MDF
to handle the maximum exchange capacity. The connectors on both ends of all
cables are equipped with velcro type clamps to prevent accidental disconnection.

Figure 3.11: M4 Punch-Down Connecting Blocks in Rear of Cabinet for Digital

Station Termination
1A 2B
P1 P1
1A 2B
P2 P2
Figure 3.12: 4601 Central Exchange Termination Blocks for Digital Stations

L001 L002 L003 M001
1A 1B 2A 1B
P1 P1
P1 P1 P1
1A 1B 2A 1B
P2 P2 P2 P2
Figure 3.13: Cat. 4602 Central Exchange Termination Blocks for Digital
Stations
L001 L002 L003 M001 L004 L005
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B
P1 P1 P1
P1 P1 P1
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B
P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
Stations

L001 L002 L003 M001
1A 1B 2A 2B
P1 P1
P1 P1 P1
1A 1B 2A 2B
P2 P2 P2 P2
L004 L005 L006 L007
3A 1B
3B 4A 4B
P1
P1 P1 P1
P1
3A 3B 4A 4B
P2 P2 P2 P2
Stations
MDF Block Labels for Digital Stations
Station Wiring at MDF

Each 100 pair connecting block is labeled with left and right halves designated
Group A and Group B respectively. Group A and B each correspond to a node.
The clip pair numbering designation on each half of the block is 1 through 50.
Pairs numbering sequences of 1-24 and 26-49 are used for station wiring on both
Group A and B. Station pairs are connected to clips on each block using the Cat.
8880 punch tool. Only one pair and one station may be attached to each station clip

pair. Termination information should be recorded on Installer Worksheet in the

Appendix section.
1. Strip back as much cable jacket as necessary to expose the conductor pairs.
2. Route each pair through the same slot in the fanning strip in its mated state.
Separate the conductors of each pair inside the fanning strip and place in the
appropriate quick clips.
3. Terminate each conductor using an impact tool or equivalent.
Figure 3.16: Terminating Wires to Clips on Block
4. Record each pair location on the Installer Worksheet.
Keep the tool perpendicular to the clock when terminating the conductors.
Twisting of the tool while terminating can result in bent pins and subsequent
damage to the S66™ block.

Figure 3.17: M4 100 Pair Connecting Block for Digital Stations
Extension Assignments
Station extension assignments can be made in the programming mode by either

auto-assign or by manual free-numbering. In either case, the installer worksheet
data for each station location and the L node block/pair number to which it is
connected will be required. See the “Programming” chapter for more details.
Modem Wiring at MDF
Connections for modems in all nodes are factory wired for centralized exchanges.
Each L node utilizes pair 25 and 50 for Modem wiring. The “M” node connections
will vary according to the size of the exchange. These factory wiring locations on
each MDF block of the digital rack are protected by Red Special Service Markers.
Do not make any additional connections to these locations. The table below shows

connection arrangements for each of the four basic exchange cabinets with
capacity between 96 to 336.
Exch. Card Node/ Group Group Node/ Card
Cable Label Label Cable
Type Slot Rack A Pair B Pair Rack Slot
L001 1A-P1 Rx 25 to 50 Tx 1B-P2 L002

4601 8 8
1A 1A-P2 Tx 50 to 25 Rx 1B-P1 1B
L001 1A-P1 Rx 25 to 3 Tx 2B-P1 M001
8 1
1A 1A-P2 Tx 50 to 4 Rx 2B-P1 2B
L002 1B-P1 Rx 25 to 11 Tx 2B-P1 M001
4602 8 2
1B 1B-P2 Tx 50 to 12 Rx 2B-P1 2B
L003 2A-P1 Rx 25 to 19 Tx 2B-P1 M001
8 3
2A 2A-P2 Tx 50 to 20 Rx 2B-P1 2B
L004 3A-P1 Rx 25 to 28 Tx 2B-P2 M001
8 4
3A 3A-P2 Tx 50 to 29 Rx 2B-P2 2B
4603
L005 3B-P1 Rx 25 to 36 Tx 2B-P2 M001
8 5
3B 3B-P2 Tx 50 to 37 Rx 2B-P2 2B
L006 4A-P1 Rx 25 to 44 Tx 2B-P2 M001
8 6
4A 4A-P2 Tx 50 to 45 Rx 2B-P2 2B
4604
L007 4B-P1 Rx 25 to 47 Tx 2B-P2 M001
8 7
4B 4B-P2 Tx 50 to 46 Rx 2B-P2 2B
50 Tx 2B-P2 M001
Used for tie line to second 336 capacity cabinet. 8
25 Rx 2B-P1 2B
Figure 3.18: MDF Modem Cross Connect Wire List M4 100 Pair Block for
Digital Stations
1. Card Slot refers to the modem card position within the node.
2. Node/Rack specifies the node designation and card rack location in a basic
exchange cabinet.
3. The connecting cable between the backplane and connecting block is
designated P1 or P2.
4. The pairs are labeled Receive (Rx) and Transmit (Tx). Both Rx and Tx pairs
are non-polar.
5. The 100 pair connecting block is labeled with left and right halves designated
Group A and Group B respectively. Group A and B each correspond to an
individual node. The clip pair numbering designation on the block repeats for
each half.

Connecting M4 Termination Blocks to Rear of Central Exchange
Refer to Figure 3.12 on page 3-20, Figure 3.13 on page 3-21, Figure 3.14 on page
3-21, and Figure 3.15 on page 3-22 to view the connections of each plug on the
M4 Termination Block and its associated header on the rear of the backplane of the
Central Exchange for digital station termination.
1A-P2
1A-P1
Figure 3.19: Example of Connections on Rear of Central Exchange to M4

Terminal Blocks for Digital Stations
Refer to the Figures below for detailed wiring for Digital Stations.

TO M4 TERMINATION BLOCK FRONT SECTION
Installation & Wiring
L002 L001
P3 P3
J12 J12

1B-P2 1A-P2
P4 P4
1B-P1 1A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
Stations
DANGER
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
LINE IN P15
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 HIGH VOLTAGE
20
F1
(20A)
J11 J12 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 TP4

BAT(+) 28V P16
BAT(-)
TP5
GND
Figure 3.20: 4601 Central Exchange Backplane Connections for Digital

System Wiring
3-27
3-28
FRONT SECTION
TO M4 TERMINATION BLOCKS
System Wiring
L002 L001
P3 P3
J12 J12
1B-P2 1A-P2
P4 P4
1B-P1 1A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
M001 L003
P3 P3
J12 J12
2B-P2 2A-P2
P4 P4
Stations
2B-P1 2A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
LINE IN P15 DANGER

CAUTION
DO NOT OPEN
HIGH VOLTAGE
20 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
F1
(20A)
J11 J12 TP4

BAT(+) BAT(-) 28V
J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 TP5
GND


FRONT SECTION
L002 L001
P3 P3
J12 J12
1B-P2 1A-P2
P4 P4
1B-P1 1A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
M001 L003
P3 P3
J12 J12
2B-P2 2A-P2
P4 P4
2B-P1 2A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
L005 L004
P3 P3
J12 J12
3B-P2 3A-P2
P4 P4
3B-P1 3A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
LINE IN P15 DANGER

CAUTION
DO NOT OPEN
HIGH VOLTAGE
20 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
F1
(20A)
J11 J12 TP4

BAT(+) BAT(-) 28V P16
J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 TP5
GND

Stations

L002 L001
P3 P3
J12 J12
1B-P2 1A-P2
P4 P4
1B-P1 1A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
M001 L003
P3 P3
J12 J12
2B-P2 2A-P2
P4 P4
2B-P1 2A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
L005 L004
P3 P3
J12 J12
3B-P2 3A-P2
P4 P4
3B-P1 3A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
L007 L006
P3 P3
J12 J12
4B-P2 4A-P2
P4 P4
4B-P1 4A-P1
J11 J11
TP2 TP1 TP2 TP1
LINE IN P15 DANGER

CAUTION
DO NOT OPEN
HIGH VOLTAGE
20 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
F1
(20A)
J11 J12 TP4

BAT(+) BAT(-) 28V
P16
J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 TP5
GND

Stations

Analog Station Wiring

The rear of the component rack (I/O board) for analog station wiring termination is
comprised of screw terminal blocks associated with the analog line cards.
Card Slots Cards
I/O Board
Figure 3.24: Component Rack for Analog Station Wiring (Rear View)
I/O Board for Analog Stations
The I/O Board is located at the back side of the component rack. It is equipped
with screw terminals for station wire terminations.
Network Station wire

Connection terminations
(J1 - J6)
Figure 3.25: I/O Board for Analog Station Wiring

Analog Station Wire Terminations
Terminations for shielded twisted pair analog station cables are shown for J1. Each
station is connected to one pair of terminals and ground. Drain wires from analog
stations connect to the terminal labeled “GND”. Every two pairs shares one GND
position.
Figure 3.26: Station Wire Terminations at J1
Analog stations are wired to terminal pairs that correspond to the Cat. 4656 Analog
Line Card. Each “J” terminal strip corresponds to one analog line card.

Audio Pairs
.
Shield Drain
Wires
inserted into
GND
Figure 3.27: Wire Termination for Analog Stations
There is one GND terminal for every two pairs on the I/O Board. Shield wires from
two pairs will share the GND terminal (as depicted above).
1. Strip back as much cable as necessary to terminate the conductors.

2. Route each pair through the screw terminals and secure them with a screw
driver.
3. Route the drain wires from two twisted pair wires to the same screw terminal
labeled “GND” and secure with a screwdriver.
Figure 3.28: Terminating Analog Station Wires on the Central Exchange
Wiring Digital and Analog Stations on the Same System

Systems that incorporate both digital and analog stations will use screw terminal
blocks on the back of the Central Exchange rack to terminate wiring. Refer to
“Analog Station Wiring” on page 3-31. Digital Station wiring is described below.

Digital stations are wired to pairs that correspond to the ECHO-RMLC Digital line
Card. See figure below.
Figure 3.29: Digital Station Wiring for Systems with Digital and Analog
Stations
Modem Interconnects
L001 M001 L005 M001

RXA J1-6 (TXA) RXA J5-6 (TXA)
RXB J1-7 (TXB) RXB J5-7 (TXB)
TXA J1-8 (RXA) TXA J5-8 (RXA)
TXB J1-9 (RXB) TXB J5-9 (RXB)
L002 M001 L006 M001

L003 M001 L007 M001

L004 M001
RXA J4-6 (TXA)
RXB J4-7 (TXB) 2 - twisted pairs of a Cat-5 Cable or better
TXA J4-8 (RXA) maximum length 2000 ft (609 m)
TXB J4-9 (RXB)
Figure 3.30: Analog Exchange Interconnects for 336 Capacity System

Two twisted pairs of a Cat-5 cable or better are used to connect the Tx to Rx
Modem connection terminal screws. Refer to “Cat-5 Cable Digital Switch
Interconnect” on page 3-18.
M-Node to M-Node Interconnects
4650 Analog M-Node to 4650 Analog M-Node

M001 M002
J7-RXA (screw terminal) J7-TXA (screw terminal)

J7-RXB (screw terminal) J7-TXB (screw terminal)
J7-TXA (screw terminal) J7-RXA (screw terminal)
J7-TXB (screw terminal) J7-RXB (screw terminal)
4650 Analog M-Node to 4650 Digital M-Node

M001 (Analog) M002 (Digital)
J7-RXA (screw terminal)

Pair 50 (TX) (punch block)
J7-RXB (screw terminal)
J7-TXA (screw terminal)
J7-TXB (screw terminal)
4650 Digital M-Node to 4650 Analog M-Node

M001 (Digital) M002 (Analog)
J7-RXA (screw terminal)

J7-RXB (screw terminal)
J7-TXA (screw terminal)
Pair 25 (RX) (punch block)
J7-TXB (screw terminal)
4650 Digital M-Node to 4650 Digital M-Node

M001 (Digital) M002 (Digital)
Pair 50 (TX) (punch block) Pair 25 (RX) (punch block)

Pair 25 (RX) (punch block) Pair 50 (TX) (punch block)
2 - twisted pairs of a Cat-5 cable or better. Maximum length 2000 ft (609 m)
Figure 3.31: ECHO-RMDS M-Node to M-Node Interconnects
Power Supply
The same power supply is used for the analog stations and digital stations. Refer to
“Power Supply” on page 3-35.

System Power On Checklist Installation & Wiring
System Power On Checklist

Prior to power-up and initialization, the Central Exchange checklist should be
reviewed to avoid start-up delays or overload conditions.
Preliminary Procedures
1. AC Power and Battery switches should be Off.
2. Verify that the Central Exchange cabinet is properly grounded.
3. Verify that the Power Supply Modules are properly seated in their connectors.
4. Verify that the connectors for the DC output power cables between Power
Rack J1-10 and each Card Rack backplane J12 are plugged in and seated. See
Figure 3.20 on page 3-27 - Figure 3.23 on page 3-30.
5. Verify all PCBs are firmly plugged into the correct color coded slot positions.
Compare the color of the PCB handle and the colored tabs at the top of each
card rack.
6. The dipswitches on each Digital Switch card should be set according to
“Dipswitch Settings Summary” on page 3-15.
7. Inspect the MDF connecting blocks for shorted wiring between clips.
8. Verify the plug-ended MDF cables are secure at both backplane and
connecting block ends.
9. If optional battery backup was installed, verify correctness of polarity.
Power On Sequence
The power On sequence involves the proper application of AC power to the
system while monitoring LED indicators on Power Supply Modules, Digital
Switches, Modems, and Alarm Card.
1. Attach AC power cord to IEC connector P15 on Power Rack and plug the cord
into the dedicated AC outlet. Turn On the AC Power switch.
a. Each Power Supply: A green AC and a green DC LED should be On,

and the fans should be running.
b. All Digital Switch cards: Upper left green “U” LED should flash On
continuously.
c. All Modem cards: Green “RCV Data” LED should be On (except
Modem card in Top Node slot 8 and in “M” to “M”, or “N” to “N” slots).
d. One Modem card in Top Node slot 8: Yellow “Mstr Clock” LED On.
e. Alarm Card: Green LED On.
2. Check for 28V dc on Power Rack backplane Test Points TP4 & 5 and all Card
Rack backplane Test Points TP1 & 2. Refer to Figure 3.20 on page 3-27 -
Figure 3.23 on page 3-30.
3. If optional Battery Backup was installed, turn Battery Switch On. Repeat step 2.
4. The system is ready for programming. If any problems have occurred, refer to
“Maintenance and Troubleshooting”.

4600 Central Exchange Typical Series 4300 Station
"L" Node
MDF
Exchange to Station Wiring
4600 Central Exchange 4600 Central Exchange

"M" Node Cat-5 or better. 2000ft. (609m) "M" Node or Single "L" Node
Wiring Diagrams

Tx Rx
Rx Tx
Main Exchange to Slave Exchange Wiring
MDF MDF
N/A
N/A
Typical Series 4300 One or Two 4375 Spectrum 430/460 Typical Series 4300
Station 4375 Interface Interface Central Exchange Station
IFS Modem Fiber Lines IFS Modem
Two Wire Two Wire

Two Wire Full Duplex Full Duplex
Full Duplex
N/A N/A
See note See note
N/A N/A
Station to Central Exchange Via Fiber Optic Modems
Note 1: Fiber Optic Transceiver, International
Cat-5 or better Cat-5 or better FIber Systems Series D1000 or equal
Main Exchange to Slave Exchange Via Fiber Optic Modems
4600 Central Exchange Two Fiber
4600
Lines
"M" Node IFS Modem IFS Modem Central Exchange "M" Node or Single "L" Node
Figure 3.32: Basic SpecEtrum 460 Wiring

Tx Rx R
Rx JERON
Tx
MDF MDF
N/A See note See note N/A
N/A N/A
of
Cat-5 or better Cat-5 or better Note 1: Fiber Optic Transceiver, International Fiber Systems Series D1200 or equal
Wiring Diagrams
3-37
3-38
Wiring Diagrams
Single Station Wiring
Station to Exchange Via Fiber Optic Line

Typical Series 4600 Up To 30mi.
Station 4375 Interface Single Fiber 4375 Interface
Line
To 460
Central
Exchange
N/A N/A
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
Transceiver Transceiver
Line See Note 1 See Note 1 N/A Line
N/A 4381
4381
Cat-5 cable or better Cat-5 cable or better
Notes
1. Fiber Optic Transceiver, International Fiber Systems
Series D1000 or equal.
Figure 3.33: Single Station to Exchange Wiring



ECHO-RMDS ECHO-RMDS
Central Exchange Cat. 9754 Cat. 9754 Central Exchange
TXA RX+ TX+ RXA Main Exchange to Slave Exchange Via Cat. 9754
TXB RX- TX- Modem to Ethernet Interface
RXB
TX+ LAN TXA
RXA RX+
RXB TX- Switch TXB
RX-
with ECHO-RMMC N/A N/A withECHO-RMMC

N/A N/A
Cat-5 or better
Cat-5 or better
Ethernet Interface
E l e c tr o n i c S y s te m s , In c .
1 7 4 3 W . R o s e h i l l D r . C h i c a g o , IL . 6 0 6 6 0
Exchange to Exchange Connection via 9754 Modem to Ethernet Interface
Title
Spectrum 460 System Wiring
Figure 3.34: Exchange to Exchange Connection via Cat. 9754 Modem to

Wiring Diagrams
3-39
3-40
Wiring Diagrams
TYPICAL CALL STATION

Extended Range Line Card
J2 WITH -EXT OPTION

460 Exchange
J8
w/ EXT Line Card
UP TO 2.4 mi.
LOCAL POWER SUPPLY IS REQUIRED.

CALL STATION WITH - EXT OPTION
DOES NOT DERIVE POWER FROM
4359 LINE CARD.
4381
POWER LINE
SUPPLY
Figure 3.35: Extended Range System Wiring


Relay outputs #1 through Relay outputs #1 through Relay outputs #1 through
#16 on 4378 #1 are cont- #16 on 4378 #2 are cont- #16 on 4378 #3 are cont-
rolled by station extensions rolled by station extensions rolled by station extensions
connected to Cat. 4358 Line connected to Cat. 4358 Line connected to Cat. 4358 Line
Cards #1 and #2 for Main Exchange Cards #3 and #4 for Main Exchange Cards #5 and #6 for Main Exchange
RS-232
460 P2 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
Exchange 4378 Relay 4378 Relay 4378 Relay
4377 Logic
Main A B B B B

Interface Interface #1 Interface #2 Interface #3
J4
J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3
COM 16 1 COM 16 1 COM 16 1
4380
Relay Contacts Relay Contacts Relay Contacts
Power
Supply
24Vdc
UL Listed Relay outputs #1 through Relay outputs #1 through Relay outputs #1 through
#16 on 4378 #4 are cont- #16 on 4378 #5 are cont- #16 on 4378 #6 are cont-
rolled by station extensions rolled by station extensions rolled by station extensions
connected to Cat. 4358 Line connected to Cat. 4358 Line connected to Cat. 4358 Line
Line Cards #1 and #2 for Slave Exchange Cards #3 and #4 for Slave ExchangeCards #5 and #6 for Slave Exchange
95-240 VAC
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
4378 Relay 4378 Relay 4378 Relay
Interface B Interface B Interface
#4 #5 #6
Cat. 4377 Logic Interface/Cat. 4378 Relay Interface Wiring
J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3
COM 16 1 COM 16 1 COM 16 1
Relay Contacts Relay Contacts Relay Contacts
A - Factory furnished 6ft. RS-232 cable.

B - Factory furnished 1ft. 8 conductor modular cable. E l e c tr o n i c S y s te m s , In c ..
1 7 4 3 W . R o s e h i l l D r . C h i c a g o , IL . 6 0 6 6 0
Title Wiring for 4377 Logic Interface to 4378 Relay Interface Used
Figure 3.36: 4377 Logic Interface to 4378 Relay Interface Wiring

Size Document Number Rev
A
Date: T ues day , D ec em ber 14, 2004 Sheet 1 of 1

Wiring Diagrams
3-41
Wiring Diagrams Installation & Wiring
E-IST Master Station & E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Wiring
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Masterr

Factory Cable
E-IST Maser Station
J4
Junction Box
RED
1 Twisted Pair
(See Table 1)
1 Twisted Pair
(See Table 1)
Max. Distance
2000ft.
4500ft.
6336ft.
Table 1
AWG
24
22
20
460 exchange
Figure 3.37: Detailed Wiring for E-IST/E-MDS/E-MDSMG to ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card

1
N.O. MUTE RELAY
J4
430/460 4616 P.A. PAGE STATION
CENTRAL AUDIO TO P.A. PAGE
4 3 2 1
EXCHANGE AMPLIFIER
J2

See Table 1
ECHO-PAI / ECHO-BGM Wiring
J4
4626 MUSIC AUDIO FROM
DISTRIBUTION MUSIC SOURCE
4 3
STATION 100mV RMS NOMINAL
J2
See Table 1
Table 1
AWG Max.Distance
24 2000ft.
22 4500ft.
Figure 3.38: Detailed Wiring for ECHO-PAI and ECHO-BGM Stations

20 6336ft.
Wiring Diagrams
3-43
3-44
Wiring Diagrams
Caller ID Interface
1 Twisted Pair
(See Table 1)
RED
J2 J1
GREEN
YELLOW
ECHO-CID
Caller ID
Telephone Caller-ID Telephone
Alternate Connection
460 Exchange Interface
J3
CO Port on PBX system
4381
LINE Power
Supply
Table 1
AWG Max. Distance
24 2000ft.
22 4500ft.
Figure 3.39: ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface Wiring

20 6336ft.

4381
POWER LINE
SUPPLY
Remote Power Wiring
Junction Box
GRN

430/460
Central Exchange RED Factory Cable
* Note: Alternative DATA/POWER Jack

located on bottom of unit.
4324 MASTER STATION

EQUIPPED FOR
REMOTE POWER
Figure 3.40: Cat. 4324 Remote Power Wiring

Wiring Diagrams
3-45
3-46
Wiring Diagrams
Normally Open or Normally

Closed Set of Contacts
Table #2 J4 (See Table 2)
Jumper P2 External Contacts
P2
In Place Normally Closed External Audio Source
Not In Place Normally Open
Audio Control Interface
ECHO-AIU Audio Control Interface
430/460 J2
Central Exchange See Table 1
Table 1
AWG Max. Distance
24 2000ft.
22 4500ft.
20 6336ft.
Figure 3.41: Detailed Wiring for ECHO-AIU Audio Control Interface


430/460
Central Exchange
See Table 1

Cat. 4327 Elevator Substation
J2
4327 Elevator
Sub-Station
J3
OR
10" Pigtail Wires To normally open,momentary contact
switch supplied by others.
BRN
Table 1
AWG Max. Distance
24 2000ft. R
22 4500ft. E L E C T R O N IC S Y S T E M S , IN C .
JERON
1 7 4 3 W . R O S E H IL L D R . C H IC A G O , IL . 6 0 6 6 0
20 6336ft. Title
Figure 3.42: Detailed Wiring for Cat. 4327 Elevator Substation

4327 DETAILED WIRING
Size Document Number Rev
A 432751
Wiring Diagrams
3-47
Wiring Diagrams Installation & Wiring

Equipment
.
Equipment Common and Port Equipment
Common and Port Equipment

ON
AC
POWER
OFF
ON
BATTERY
PS PS PS
3 2 1 OFF
R
JERON
Figure 4.1: 4686 Power Rack
The rack has a power control panel with a Primary power and Battery disconnect
switches. The rack will accept up to three ECHO-RMPS plug-in power supply
modules. The rack is factory equipped with one supply for each 170 stations. An
optional third supply may be ordered for operating redundancy for the primary
supply. ECHO-RMPS Power Supplies are UL Listed and CSA, CE certified. The input
power to the rack is 85-264V ac @ 47-63 Hz and is provided through an IEC
60320 connectorized line cord. A built-in battery charger is provided for external
24V gel-cell batteries (batteries by others).
ECHO-RMCR Digital Card Rack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 4.2: ECHO-RMCR Card Rack

Common and Port Equipment Equipment
This rack contains twenty card slots and a backplane assembly with twenty DIN
card connectors, two power connectors, two RS-232 serial data ports and four,
twenty-five pair connectorized station line cables.
ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module

The plug-in module is self-cooled and provides a highly
regulated source of 28V dc for powering the Central Exchange
and stations. Diagnostic indicators are provided for normal and
abnormal conditions. The ECHO-RMPS Power Supply is UL Listed and
CSA, CE certified.
Figure 4.3: ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module
ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card
Contains a microprocessor, memory with system

operating instructions and the digital switch, which
controls data traffic paths between nodes and stations.
Equipped with LED diagnostic indicators.
Figure 4.4: ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card Side View

Equipment Common and Port Equipment
ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card
Provides communications and timing control between

system nodes. Allows remote exchanges to be networked
(tie-lined) using two pairs of a Cat-5 cable or better, fiber
modems, or Cat. 9754 Modem to Ethernet Interface.
Equipped with LED diagnostic indicators.
Figure 4.5: ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card Side View
RCV
DATA
MSTR
CLOCK
The handle colors of the 460 system cards is charted below.
Card Catalogue No. Card Handle Color

ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Card Yellow
ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card Red
ECHO-RMAC Alarm Diagnostic Card Blue
ECHO-RMCC Conference Card Green
Cat. 4656 Analog Line Card White
ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card White
Cat. 4659 Line Card with EXT White
Table 4.1: 460 System Card Handle Colors
ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card

Supports eight, single twisted pair station lines with access to all available system
links and features. Station range is 1.2 Mi. (2Km.).
Cat. 4656 Analog Line Card

Supports eight, single twisted pair, shielded station lines with access to all
available system links and features. Station range is 1000 ft.

E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station Equipment
Cat. 4659 Line Card

Same as ECHO-RMLC except station range is extended to 2.4Mi. (4Km.) Used with
stations equipped with EXT option.
ECHO-RTC Real Time Clock

The ECHO-RTC is a real time clock for date and time stamping of call activity data
transmitted on the 4350 RS-232 port.
ECHO-RMAC Alarm Diagnostic Card

Provides an indicator for system-wide status of all critical functions.
ECHO-RMCC Conference Card

Permits up to 10 simultaneous conferences with up to five members with a
maximum of 32 stations.
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station

Description
Administrative Master stations are used in the ECHO
460 system as the control centers for call-
in annunciation, intercom, and voice paging. The
station provides a direct dial keypad and seven
configurable function keys. A maximum of eight
administrative master stations may be connected to a
digital switch (with Night Mode enabled).
Calls from rooms will be annunciated by priority on
the digital LCD display showing the room number,
priority level, and directory name. Incoming calls
are accompanied by an alert tone. A scrolling feature
allows the attendant to preview a pending call list
and answer a call out-of-sequence. Clear, crisp two-
way voice communication may be established using the panel microphone and
speaker or the telephone handset. The spill-resistant Mylar panel overlay has clear
acrylic lenses for function key labels. Console volume levels at individual stations
are adjustable and may be adjusted with digital panel keys or through local
attributes programming using the ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software.

Equipment E-MDS/E-MDSMGAdministrative Master Station
Call priority and

notification LEDs
Handset
Two-line LCD display
Panel Speaker Tone silence key
Programmable
function keys
Volume Controls
Numeric keypad
Directory scrolling keys
Talk key Cancel key

Panel Microphone
Figure 4.6: E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station
J3 J4
J3 and J4 are RJ-11 jacks for connection to a clip on
the terminal block associated with a digital line card.
Figure 4.7: E-MDS/E-MDSMG Connections

E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station Equipment
LED Indicators
The E-MDS/E-MDSMG is equipped with four LED indicators (Figure 4.6).
• Routine (green) illuminates to indicate a routine-level incoming call

• Emergency (red) illuminates to indicate an emergency-level incoming call
• More Calls (yellow) illuminates to indicate multiple calls on the system
• Call Engineer (yellow) illuminates to indicate a system or station error
Control Panel Keys
The E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Master is equipped with control panel keys (Figure 4.6 on page
4-7). The key functions are described below:
Tone Silence
The tone silence feature allows the attendant to silence alert tones at the master
station. Pressing the button once will silence tones. If new calls are placed to the
admin master, the tones will resound to alert the attendant to the new call on the
system. The call alert tone that sounds at the E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Master represents the
highest priority call on the system.
If an emergency-level call is placed to the master station, the attendant may silence
the alert tone by pressing Tone Silence. If a routine-level call is subsequently
placed, the alert tones will resound. In this case, the alert tones for an emergency-
level call will sound as it is higher priority than the routine-level call.
V+, V
V keys serve two functions:
• Volume control (adjusts local volume at the E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Master)

• Entering global attributes programming in Installer Mode
DK, DL
D keys serve three functions:
• Scrolling through list of queued calls

• Scrolling through a name/number directory of up to 20 previously entered
station numbers with assigned names
• Enter local attributes programming in Installer Mode
Numeric Keys
Numeric keys are used to dial master or room station extensions, paging and
master operators. These keys are also used to enter values while in the local and
global programming modes.

Equipment E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station
Talk & Cancel

T is the Talk key.
X is the Cancel key.
Function Keys
Programmable function keys allow single-touch feature activation when using the
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master. Seven keys are available for programming as
function keys on the E-MDS/E-MDSMG (code version 1.01 or greater is required in the
E-MDS/E-MDSMG, and program code version 1.3.3 or greater is required in the
central exchange). In addition to being able to enter a custom function, the following
functions are available for programming to function key operation:
Available Functions for Function Key Operation

Emergency All Call (EAC) All Call
PA Page Group Page
Manual Group Page Clear All Admin Calls
Hold Transfer
Conference Message Set
Change Remote Station Privacy Change Remote Station Volume
Sentinel Day Mode Sentinel Night Mode
Table 4.2: Programmable Function Key Operations
The tone silence key

is not a
programmable
function key.
Function keys 1 to 7
are programmable.
Figure 4.8: Programmable Function Keys for E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Master

E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Stations Equipment
Function keys are programmable for any of the operations listed in Table 4.2. The
tone silence key is not one of the programmable function keys; it is dedicated to
silencing tones at the admin master only.
E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Stations

Description
Handset master stations may be used in desktop or

wall mount applications to provide hands-free or
private handset, duplex, two-way voice
communication. The station’s digital signal
processor (DSP) instantly adjusts loudspeaking
volume levels to compensate for acoustically
difficult locations while providing instantaneous
connections and clear, crisp voice quality.
Calls from rooms will be annunciated by priority on
the digital LCD display showing the room number,
priority level, and directory name. Incoming calls
are accompanied by an alert tone. A scrolling feature
allows the attendant to preview a pending call list
and answer a call out-of-sequence. Clear, crisp two-way voice communication
may be established using the panel microphone and speaker or the telephone
handset. The spill-resistant Mylar panel overlay has clear acrylic lenses for
function labels. Console volume levels at individual stations are adjustable and
may be adjusted with digital panel keys or through local attributes using the ECHO-SFW
Administration Program Software.

Equipment E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Stations
Handset
Two-line LCD display
Panel Speaker
Volume Controls
Numeric keypad
Panel Microphone
Talk key Cancel key
Figure 4.9: 4324 Handset Master Station
J3 J4
J3 and J4 are RJ-11 jacks for connection to a clip on
the terminal block associated with a digital line card.
Figure 4.10: E-DSM/E-DSMG Connections

E-IST Master Stations Equipment
E-IST Master Stations

Description
Federal Signal E-IST Master Stations are designed for

hands-free duplex operation. Calls from rooms will be annunciated
by priority on the digital LCD display showing the room
number, priority level, and directory name. Incoming calls are
accompanied by an alert tone. A scrolling feature allows the
attendant to preview a pending call list and answer a call out
of-sequence. Clear, crisp two-way voice communication may
be established using the panel microphone and speaker or the
telephone handset. The spill-resistant Mylar panel overlay has
clear acrylic lenses for function labels. Console volume levels
at individual stations are adjustable may be adjusted with
digital panel keys or through the local attributes section of ECHO-SFW
Administration Program Software.
Speaker
Two-line
LCD display
Membrane keypad
(4321)
Volume Controls
Conductive rubber keys
(E-IST)
Panel
Microphone
Talk key Cancel key
Figure 4.11: 4321 Master Station

Equipment E-DD1/E-DD2Single and Multi-Call Sub-
Figure 4.12: E-IST Wire Termination
E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Multi-Call

Substations
Description
Federal Signal E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Multiple-Call

Substations provide efficient, hands-free duplex two-way
voice communications with single button call capability.
Applications include doors, dock areas or any location where
limited call selection is required. Digital Signal Processor
(DSP) technology instantly adjusts loudspeaking volume
levels to compensate for acoustically difficult locations while
providing instantaneous, high-speed connections and clear,
crisp voice quality.

E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Multi-Call Substations Equipment
Speaker
Call-placed/audio
connection indicator LED.
Call buttons:
4318 (one button)
4319 (two buttons)
4328 (three buttons)
4329 (four buttons)
4338 (one button)
4342 (one button)
4343 (two buttons)
Cancel button
Panel
Microphone
Figure 4.13: E-DD2 Dual-Call Substation
Normally
Open Relay
Contacts
Power/Data
Figure 4.14: E-DD1/E-DD2 Wire Termination
4-14 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation

Equipmet Cat. 4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Sub-
Cat. 4211/13, E-SSMB1,E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2

High-Security Substations
Description
Cat. 4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR and

E-SSSB2 High-Security Substations place
intercom calls to master stations.
Applications include parking garages,
detention facilities and public areas.
High-security substations are
constructed of heavy-gauge stainless
steel. Call buttons are tamper-proof
and the vandal-resistant speaker is
protected by an internal, steel baffle.
High-security substations connect to a
digital central exchange using single,
twisted-pair wiring. Station data is retained in solid-state, non-volatile memory
and will remain intact if power is removed from the system; reprogramming is not
required in the event of a power failure.
Button Type Two-Gang Three-Gang

Metal Activator Button Cat. 4213 E-SSMB1L
Red Mushroom-Type Button Cat. 4211 E-SSMB1
Dual Metal Activator Buttons E-SSSB2
Metal Activator Button with
E-SSMB1KR
Cancel Key Switch
Table 4.3: High-Security Substation Formats

Cat. 4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substations Equipment
Tamper-resistant
speaker/microphone Flush, stainless steel
call button
Figure 4.15: 4213 High-Security Substation
Tamper-resistant Dual,
speaker stainless steel
call buttons
Microphone
Figure 4.16: E-SSSB2 Dual-Call High Security Substation

Equipment 4308/09 Sentinel Sound Detector Substation
J2:
1 & 2: Data/Power to terminal clips associated
with a ECHO-RMLC Line Card
Figure 4.17: E-SSMB1/13 and E-SSSB2 Wire Termination
LED Indicator
The following high-security substations are equipped with an LED indicator:
• Cat. 4211/02
• Cat. 4213/02
• E-SSMB1/02
• E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2
The LED functions as follows:
• Lights steadily to indicate a call has been placed

• Flashes rapidly to indicate an audio connection has been established
• Extinguishes when audio connection is terminated
4308/09 Sentinel Sound Detector Substation

Description
Cat. 4308/09 Sentinel™ Sound Detector

Substations automatically place intercom
calls to master stations upon detection of
qualified audio events. Applications
include parking garages, detention
facilities and public areas.
Sentinel stations are constructed of heavy-
gauge stainless steel. The call buttons are
tamper-proof and the vandal-resistant
speaker is protected by an internal, steel
baffle. Sentinel stations connect to a

4308/09 Sentinel Sound Detector Substation Equipment
central exchange using single, twisted-pair wiring. No additional wiring is

necessary to support Sentinel sound detection features. Station data is retained in
solid-state, non-volatile memory and will remain intact if power is removed from
the system; reprogramming is not required in the event of a power failure.
Button Type Three-Gang

Metal Activator Button Cat. 4308
Red Mushroom-Type Button Cat. 4309
Table 4.4: Sentinel Substations
Tamper-resistant
speaker/ Flush, stainless steel
microphone call button
Figure 4.18: 4308 Sentinel Substation
Power/Data to terminal clips

associated with a ECHO-RMLC
Digital Line Card
Figure 4.19: 4308/09 Wire Termination

Equipment Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface
Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface

Description
The Cat. 4362 PBX Interface allows ECHO

stations to place calls to or receive calls from
outside telephones. Connection is made between
the PBX interface and a digital line card on the
Central Exchange by a single, twisted pair. The
PBX interface connects to an analog port on the
PBX system that supports DTMF tones. Multiple
PBX interface units can be connected to the central
exchange.
The PBX interface allows access to the following
system features from an outside line:
• Group Page
• PA Page
• All-Call Page
• Emergency All-Call Page
• Single-Digit Speed Dialing
• Relay Activation
Indicator LEDs
The PBX interface is equipped with the following LED indicators:
• Ring (Green LED): Represents the ringing state of the interface. When
illuminated, a ring voltage is being detected by the PBX Interface.
• Connect (Red LED): Illuminates when the PBX Interface goes off-hook in
response to a ringing voltage or when the PBX Interface is being accessed
by another station in the ECHO system.
• Power (Green LED): Illuminates to signify power to the interface.This
LED should be on at all times while connected to an operating ECHO
system.
Controls
The PBX Interface is equipped with a disconnect switch that can be used to
manually terminate an existing connection.

ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface Equipment
J1: RJ-11 Analog Line Jack

J2: Power/Data to Central Exchange
S1: Disconnect Switch
Figure 4.20: 4362 Wiring Terminations
ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface

Description
The Caller ID (CID) Interface allows a CID

telephone to function like a master station in
the ECHO Digital Intercom System. The
CID Interface displays call information
(extension and name) of the calling party on
the LCD display of the CID telephone. The
CID telephone may also place calls to any
ECHO station or access ECHO paging
features. Calls may be conferenced,
transferred, or placed on hold. The calling
ECHO stations may be either substations
or master stations. Multiple CID telephones may be configured for use on the
ECHO Intercom System.

Equipment ECHO-ALMAlarm Supervision Station
Indicator LEDs
The Caller ID Interface is equipped with the following LED indicators:
• Ring (Red LED): The red LED will be illuminated when a ringing voltage
is being sent to the Caller ID telephone.
• Self Check Ok (Green LED): The green LED flashes when the power
supply is connected and indicates proper operation.
• Off-Hook Status (Yellow LED): The yellow LED illuminates to indicate
that the telephone is off hook and will turn off when the telephone is placed
back on hook.
Connection
1. Connect the four-conductor, modular cable (not included) from connector J1 to
Caller ID telephone.
2. Connect factory supplied 24Vdc power supply to J3.
3. Connect one twisted pair, non-shielded cable from the two-position plug
screw-in terminal labeled J2 on the ECHO-CID CID Interface to a clip terminal
on the punch-down associated with a digital line card at the Central Exchange.

Description
The ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station is a tone/visual station that annunciates the
current alarm status of the ECHO Intercom System. The ECHO-ALM Alarm
Supervision Station occupies a single, digital line card position.
Speaker
Bi-color LED
Figure 4.21: ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station Front View

ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station Equipment
Figure 4.22: ECHO-ALM Detailed Wiring
Indicator LEDs
The Alarm Supervision Station is equipped with a single, bi-color LED indicator
to visually annunciate the following:
• System Ok. (Green LED): The LED will remain illuminated steady green to
indicate the system is running properly. There are no station or component
failures detected.
• Station failure (Yellow LED): The LED will illuminate yellow to indicate
that at least one station is failed and is not communicating with the Central
Exchange.
• Major system component failure (Red LED): The LED will illuminate red
to indicate a major component failure (i.e. a broken connection between
central exchanges would cause the red LED to illuminate).

Equipment Cat. 4210/4215 High-Security Analog Substation
Cat. 4210/4215 High-Security Analog Substation

Description
This compact station mounts in a standard

two-gang back box and is designed to
withstand abusive conditions of moisture,
temperature, dust, corrosion and vibration.
The 2.5 inch speaker/microphone is
equipped with a water and fungus resistant
Mylar cone and is protected against
tampering by an internal protective plated
steel baffle. The mar-resistant 11-gauge
stainless steel faceplate has a brushed finish
and is equipped with a call switch. Cat.
4210 has a vandal and weather resistant
flush solid metal button with a metal body. Cat. 4215 has a large red, metal
mushroom type activator. The call switch is requires momentary contact, and is
equipped with sealed gold contacts. Faceplate gasket and tamper resistant
mounting hardware are provided. All station features including call destination,
volume levels and call priority level may be programmed from a master station or
a PC with ECHO-SFW Administrative Software.
ECHO-PAI Public Address Station

Description
When a ECHO 460 Exchange is equipped with a Cat.

ECHO-PAI PA Page Interface, stations in the system may make
paging announcements over an external overhead PA page
system. The public page interface station is intended to be
used to provide an isolated interface between the
ECHO 430/460 Intercom Exchange, and the input of a
PA page amplifier. Relay contacts are provided for muting
the background music channel on the amplifier. The ECHO-PAI
station's field wiring terminals are plug-in.

ECHO-BGM Program Distribution Station Equipment
ECHO-BGM Program Distribution Station

Description
The ECHO-BGM Program Distribution Interface is used in the ECHO 430/460

system for the distribution of program audio to digital master stations. The ECHO-BGM
provides an isolated interface between the input of the ECHO-BGM, and the output of
audio sources such as CD players, cassette tape players, and radios. The ECHO-BGM has
no user controls or indicators.
Cat. 4327 Elevator Station

Description
The Federal Signal Cat. 4327 Substation is used in

elevator cars for signaling and hands-free,
loudspeaking duplex voice communication
to master stations. ADA compliance is
supported by a dual color LED indicator on
the station faceplate. This substation is
equipped with a built-in speaker,
microphone, LED indicator, and circuit
board. The components are attached to a
heavy gauge mounting panel for installation
behind an elevator operating panel. The moisture resistant speaker is protected by
a tamper-resistant steel baffle, and the microphone is enclosed in a right angle
tamper-resistant housing. Terminals are provided for the connection of a
dedicated, normally open, momentary contact switch for call placement.

Equipment ECHO-AIU Audio Control
ECHO-AIU Audio Control

Description
The ECHO-AIU Audio Control Interface connects to a

digital line position to provide an additional input for audio
signals. The Audio Control Interface allows audio from an
external device to be distributed to a single station, to
stations programmed to receive all call pages, emergency
all call pages, and to stations in particular groups. The
indicator LED illuminates to signify the contact is active
and audio is being directed to the pre-programmed
stations.
Connection
Refer to Figure 3.41 on page 3-46.
1.Connect a pair of wires from a normally open or

normally closed set of contacts to J4, terminals 1 and 2.
2. Connect a twisted pair of wires from an external audio source to J4, terminals 3
and 4.
3. Connect a twisted pair of wires from the two position plug-in screw terminal
labeled J2 on the ECHO-AIU Audio Interface to a digital line - 1 - 8 of the ECHO-RMLC
Digital Line Card.
E-MIST/E-MISM Flush Wall Mount Master

Description
The Federal Signal E-MIST/E-MISM Flush Wall Handset Master Call Station may be used to
provide hands-free or private handset duplex two-way voice communication with
LCD visual status display. The station’s digital signal processor instantly adjusts
loudspeaking volume levels to compensate for acoustically difficult locations
while providing instantaneous high-speed connections and clear, crisp voice
quality from anywhere in the room. The large, easy-to-read LCD display
instantaneously provides vital information to identify the name and number of
each calling party, provide a name and number directory as well as an online help
menu as a guide to personalizing station features. When equipped with a
membrane keypad (E-MISM) the unit is suitable for operating rooms or sterile labs
requiring frequent wipedown sterilization. The flush wall unit is equipped with a
handset as well as panel speaker and electret microphone. A standard 16 button
keypad (E-MIST) or 16 key membrane (E-MISM) and LCD display with two lines of 16
characters each is provided. The unit has a clear anodized aluminum faceplate with
a light ash tone handset with matching coilcord intended for indoor use in a flush
wall mount application with recessed backbox 4312. Refer to Figure 4.27.

Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface Equipment
Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface

Description
The Federal Signal Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface is used to support the connection of a
single Federal Signal Echo Series 4300 Station over fiber optic lines to the ECHO
Central Exchange by utilizing fiber optic transceivers.
The 4375 Fiber Optic Interface converts two-wire full duplex digital data into two
pair half duplex RS-422 data at a rate of 160 K baud. To provide the necessary
interface to optical fiber line(s) this RS-422 Rx and Tx data must be connected to
compatible (International Fiber Systems Series 1000 or equal) fiber optic
transceivers.
The 4375 Interface is housed in a surface-mount epoxy painted metal enclosure,
and is equipped with a plug-in screw terminal block for field wiring. It is supplied
with a separate plug-in 24V power supply for connection to local power.
Diagnostic LED indicators verify Rx and Tx connectivity.

Equipment Cat. 4375 Fiber Optic Interface
XMIT
LINE
RCV
NEG
POS
+
1
2
-
-
CAT. 4375
FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE
MAX.
20ft.
FACTORY SET FOR: S1

ON 24V
A. STATION SIDE
+
OFF DC
-
-
MODE
XMIT
B. EXCHANGE SIDE ON
REC
OFF
TRANSCEIVER
LINE
FIBER OPTIC
X = ROCKER
DOWN 120V
AC RS422
DATA
RS-422
OBSERVE
SEE BOTTOM POLARITY
SIDE FOR
EXCHANGE
WIRING STATION/
DIAGRAM 1 2
MODE A
24V DC
XMIT
LINE
SPECTRUM
RCV
4300 SERIES
STATION
MODE B
430/460
NEG
POS
1
+
+
2
CENTRAL
TX RX
-
-
EXCHANGE
5.562
JERON
CAT. 4375
FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE
FACTORY SET FOR: S1

ON
A. STATION SIDE OFF
MODE
B. EXCHANGE SIDE ON
OFF
6.500
X = ROCKER
DOWN
RS-422
SEE BOTTOM
SIDE FOR
EXCHANGE
WIRING
STATION/
DIAGRAM
24V DC
XMIT
LINE
RCV
NEG
POS
1
+
+
2
TX RX
-
-
JERON
1.6
Figure 4.23: Fiber Optic Interface

Cat. 4377/4378 Logic and Relay Interface Equipment
Cat. 4377/4378 Logic and Relay Interface

Description
The Cat. 4377/4378 Relay Interface option

is used to provide a maintained contact
closure when a substation places an admin
type call on the system, or when an
Administrative Master establishes an audio
connection to a substation. Each relay
contact is associated with a single
substation within the system.
5265 Direct Select Console

Description
The Direct-Select Console features 50

indicators for call-in annunciation and
50 single-touch keys for establishing
instantaneous communication to 50
room speakers. Ten additional keys are
available for single-touch selection of
configurable features such as group
page, all-call, PA page, and relay
contact activation. A direct-dial,
numeric keypad allows dialing of
extension numbers and facilitates
programming and key sequence
operation. The Cat. 5265 incorporates a handset as well as a panel microphone and
panel speaker The Mylar overlay is durable and easy to clean.

Equipment 5265 Direct Select Console
Panel microphone System status LEDs Two-line LCD display
Direct-Select Programmable
Control panel keys
buttons function buttons
Figure 4.24: 5265 Direct Select Console

5265 Direct Select Console Equipment
System Status LEDs:

Emergency Page: Notify of routine calls,
Press to activate; press emergency calls, and
again to deactivate system failure.
V+, V-: VK, VL:

Volume adjustment Directory scrolling
Scroll through global Scroll through local

programming options programming options
Cancel: Tone Silence:

Press to terminate audio Press to silence call
connection placed tone
Intercom Push to Talk: (tones automatically

Press to activate; press resound when new call is
again to deactivate placed to this master)
Numeric Keys:
Used for numeric entries
Figure 4.25: 5265 Control Panel Buttons
Connections
J3
J4 J3: RJ-11 for connection to junction box,

then connection to punch block clip
associated with a Cat. ECHO-RMLC
Digital Line Card.
J4: RJ-45 connection for optional Cat. 5266
Console Extender
Figure 4.26: Jack Connections

Equipment ECHO-RMRIVoice Recorder Interface
ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface

Description
The ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface is an analog interface between the
ECHO 460 Digital Intercom Exchange and voice recording equipment supplied
by others. The ECHO-RMRI Interface allows any or all conversations within a system to be
recorded. A ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface contains eight (8) output channels
accessible via punch blocks. Recorder channel 1–8 punch block positions are the
same as lines 1-8 of a ECHO-RMLC Line Card. The ECHO-RMRI Interface attaches to
line card positions occupied normally by ECHO-RMLC Line Cards. There may be a
maximum of six (6) ECHO-RMRI Interfaces per node in the 4600 Central Exchange.
Setup
Each of the eight channels on a ECHO-RMRI Interface is programmed as a specialty station
with an extension of “03XX”, where “XX” can be 00–99. There must not be any
duplicate extensions programmed.
Type I Setup
To program a substation for Type I recording, assign the extension (03XX) of the
desired ECHO-RMRI Interface channel to one of the call buttons. When that call button is
activated, a one-way connection is made between the substation and the pre-
programmed ECHO-RMRI Interface channel. Call abandonment will eventually drop the
connection if the substation has no cancel button.
To program a master station for type I recording, assign the extension (03xx) of the
desired ECHO-RMRI Interface channel to one of the available One or Two-Digit Speed Dial
bins. When that speed dial is activated, a one-way connection is made between the
master station and the pre-programmed ECHO-RMRI Interface channel. Press the X key to
quit.
Type II Setup
To program a master station for Type II recording, assign the extension of the
master to the appropriate ECHO-RMRI Interface channel. The number of extension digits
may vary from 2 to 4. This is accomplished by entering the extension of the master
whose two-way audio is to be recorded into the Two-Digit Speed Dial Bin 01 of the
desired ECHO-RMRI Interface channel. Whenever that master station calls another station
or is called by another station, both sides of the conversion will be sent to the
assigned recorder channel. Type II setup requires ECHO-SFW Administration
Program Software version 1.7 or greater.
Technical Data
In the idle (non-recording) state the ECHO-RMRI Interface sources 24VDC through 10
kOhms to each of the eight (8) interface output channels. When the calling station

ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface Equipment
is connected to an interface channel, the 24VDC is removed, and the following

tone sequence is initiated:
1. 500ms of Central Office dial tone. (350 + 440 Hz)

2. DTMF data burst, each DTMF tone will be on for 56ms followed by an off
time of 44ms. The contents of the DTMF data burst are described in the
following two paragraphs:
For a Type I connection the format for DTMF data burst is ssss*dddd, where ssss
is the calling station extension and dddd (03xx) is the recording channel extension
and * is the DTMF tone for the “star” key. The number of extension digits may
vary from 2 to 4.
For a Type II connection the format for DTMF data burst is ssss*dddd, where ssss
is the calling station extension and dddd is the called station extension and * is the
DTMF tone for the “star” key. The number of extension digits may vary from
2 to 4.
Dimensions (H x W x D)
• 4.00 x 6.50 x 0.625 in.
(10.1 x 16.5 x 1.6 cm)
Termination
• Euro connection to backplane
Voice Recorder Equipment Configuration

• Configure for hook-switch recorder activation, 20V level detection into
minimum 100k input impedance
Audio Output
• Transformer coupled
Tone and Voice

• -16 dBm
AC Output Impedance
• 600 Ohms
Use of this feature when the executive override warning tone is disabled may be
interpreted as a violation of federal or state laws, and an invasion of privacy.
Consult counsel with respect to applicable law before intruding on calls using this
feature.

2.000 4.500 2.000
2.875 6.500
.170 DIA.
6.156
11.312
11.812
12.312
8.062
1/2 KNOCKOUT (5 PLACES)
.312 DIA. (8 PLACES)
4.250
2.562
1.250
8.500
MATERIAL: .031 GALV
Figure 4.27: Cat. 4312 Backbox



8.5 [215.9]
6.250 [158.75]
KNOCKOUTS FOR 1/2"

AND 3/4" CONDUIT
3.580
6.585
[90.94]
[167.26]
.343 [8.71] X4
2.250
[57.15]

ECHO-SFW Administration
Program Software
.
ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Introduction
Introduction
The ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software allows you to program the global
and local attributes of the ECHO 430/430 IP/460 systems and to configure the
equipment of the ECHO 430 IP system (version 1.14 or greater) using a
connected PC.
The ECHO 430 IP System may require the programming of its equipment in
addition to the global and local attributes. Programming is required if more than
one Central Exchange or Station Hub is used in the system. The programming of
the Central Exchange(s) and Station Hub(s) should be completed prior to
installation of the system and prior to programming the global and local
attributes. For IP Setup, refer to the IP section on page 5-59. ECHO-SFW Administration
Program Software incorporates the IP setup and IP diagnostic in version 1.14 or
greater.
Minimum System Requirements

Computer
IBM PC or compatible, 120 MHz minimum, 32 MB RAM minimum, CD ROM
drive, 2 GB minimum hard drive recommended
Operating System
Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows NT
Ports
Two ports are required, one for a pointing device, and one serial port for
connection to the central control.
System Nodes
The ECHO system is comprised of functional units called nodes. When entering
Local Programming, the programmer will be prompted to select an L-node.
L-nodes are functional units that contain line cards/station hubs in the 430/430 IP
systems.
430/430 IP L Nodes
In the 430 System, an L-node consists of a Cat. 4350 Digital Switch and line cards
attached to it. In the 430 IP System, an L-node consists of a Cat. 4550 IP Central
Exchange and IP Station Hubs attached to it. The first digital switch/central
exchange in the system is assigned as node L001, the second as L002, and so on.
Pairs are numbered 01–49 on each connected L-node. (Line 25 is omitted.)

Introduction ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
460 L Nodes
Each rack on the 460 system may contain two nodes. Each L-node contains 48
pairs to which stations may be connected. Pairs are numbered 01–49 on each
connected L-node. (Line 25 is omitted.)

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Installation
Installation
1. Insert the disc containing the ECHO-SFW Administration Program
Software into the CD ROM drive of the computer.
2. Right click at the Start menu and select Explore.
3. Select CD drive
4. When the contents of the disc display, select Setup.
Figure 5.1: Welcome Screen
5. At the Welcome screen, select Next to continue with the installation.

6. Select the destination where the software application will be installed. You
have the option to accept the default location or to specify an alternate location
for software installation.

Installation ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Figure 5.2: Installation Destination
7. The user is prompted to select a program folder where the installation program
will locate the icon. The text entered at this point will display in the Start menu
on the Programs list.
Figure 5.3: Program Folder Selection

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Installation
8. The Setup Complete window notifies the user that the installation is complete.
Select Finish to conclude the setup process. The ECHO 460 Administration
icon should now appear in the Start > Programs list.
Figure 5.4: Setup Complete

Getting Started ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Getting Started
When the ECHO-SFW application is invoked, the main window will open and
prompt the user for a system password.
Figure 5.5: Enter Password
The default password is C1743BD. It is case sensitive. Once entered, the password
can be changed. The application will terminate if Cancel is selected.
Change the password by entering the File menu and selecting Edit Password.
Figure 5.6: Edit Password
Figure 5.7: Change Application Password

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Getting Started
Change the password by entering a new password in the top box, and then re
entering it in the bottom box. The password is case-sensitive and may be alpha
numeric. When finished, select Apply for the changes to take effect, or Cancel to
exit without saving the changes.
After the appropriate password has been entered, you will be prompted to select a
communications link. The list includes all available modems and serial ports.
Select the communications link option. If the communications link option chosen
is a modem, the phone number and password edit boxes will become enabled,
allowing the user enter the appropriate dialing and password information.
The modem password is C1755BD, and it is case sensitive. If the password is not
entered correctly, a communications link will not be established. When finished
with selecting the communications link, enter the appropriate password and phone
number (if a modem), and select OK. The application will then attempt to connect
to the ECHO system.
When a COM port is

selected, press OK to
connect to the system.
If a modem is selected,
enter the phone number
to dial, then the password
for the modem.
Figure 5.8: Communications Link

Getting Started ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Main Window Menu
The main window will be active when the communication link has been
established. The Main Window menu is the central point of navigation for the ECHO-SFW
application.
Application currently running
Navigation menu
Figure 5.9: Main Screen Navigation

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Global Attributes (System Programming)
Global Attributes (System Programming)
Global attributes are defined as the main system settings. All changes made to
global attributes will affect system operation and all connected stations.
Figure 5.10: Global Attributes Main Screen

Global Attributes (System Programming) ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Action Buttons
Figure 5.11: Action Buttons
Action buttons function as follows:
Update
Apply changes that have been made to configuration by selecting Update. If the
Update button is not selected, any changes that have been made will be abandoned.
Done
If there are no changes to be made, selecting Done will return you to the main
window.
Set Node ID
Set Node ID is used when portions of a system are to come online autonomously,
and can to be linked together at a later time.
Important! Set Node ID should NOT be used for general purposes!
Node Identifier
The node being

programmed is
identified here.
Figure 5.12: Node Identifier

Tone Enable
Tone Enable activates or deactivates tones at all stations.
Figure 5.13: Tone Enable
Pre-Announce (#1)
A pre-announce tone activates a two-tone sequence indicating a point-to-point
audio connection between two stations.
Repetitive (#2)
Repetitive tones periodically sound to alert that:
• A message has been placed

• A call is camped on
• Talk/Listen substations are being monitored
Call Assurance (#3)

Call assurance activates a two or three-tone sequence at a calling substation to
indicate that a successful admin or standard call has been placed.
Page Pre-Announce (#4)

A page pre-announce tone activates a tone sequence at all stations to indicate the
presence of a group page, an all call page, or an emergency all call page.
Recording Monitor (#5)

Activating the recording monitor tone will send a periodic tone to indicate that the
conversation is being recorded. (For use with the optional ECHO 460 ECHO-RMRI
Voice Recorder Interface.)

Time Limits
Time limits define the amount of time certain functions may occur. Page time
limits and ring time limits are defined below:
Figure 5.14: Time Limits
Page Time Limit

Page Time Limit defines the time that a function will remain active before it is
automatically cancelled. Typically, this is set to the off position (0). Page Time
Limit settings apply to the following call types:
• Emergency All Call

• All Call
• Group Call
• PA Page
Ring Time Limit

The ring time limit is the duration of time a station will ring before disconnecting
if the call is unanswered. Ring time limits apply to standard calls and stations that
are set to Full Privacy mode.
System Wide Extensions
System-wide extensions are two, three, or four-digit identifiers assigned to each

station. The value entered here determines the number of digits each extension
must have. The settings are defined as follows:
• 2 = two-digit extension (10–99)

• 3 = three-digit extension (100–999)
• 4 = four-digit extension (1000-9999)
Figure 5.15: System Wide Extensions

Emergency All Call
The Emergency All Call feature allows the user to set a password that must be
entered before an emergency all call is placed on the system. The default setting
for this is 0 (off).
Figure 5.16: Emergency All Call
Active Node Count
Active Node Count settings are to be used for diagnostic purposes by qualified
maintenance personnel only!
Changing system node settings can seriously affect system functionality! This
setting is for use by qualified maintenance personnel!
Figure 5.17: Active Node Count
Miscellaneous
Figure 5.18: Miscellaneous
Page Reply Time

When an all call or group page is placed by a master station, attendants at receiving
master stations are prompted to respond to the page by pressing the Talk button.
Once the reply is sent, the LCD at the receiving station will be cleared. If the Page
Reply Time is set to a value between 1 and 10 minutes, the LCD at the receiving

station will automatically be cleared, regardless of whether or not that station has
sent a reply. If this value is set to 0, the display will not clear until a reply has been
sent.
Message Tone Interval

The Message Tone Interval is defined as the period between message signal tones.
Call Abandonment
Figure 5.19: Call Abandonment
Time Interval
The Time Interval is the maximum amount of time a connection will be
maintained between stations if one of the stations is a substation that is designated
as Sub. Without Cancel or Talk/Listen Sub.
Call Forward No Answer
Figure 5.20: Call Forward No Answer
Time Interval
The Call Forward No Answer feature forwards calls from one master station to
another if the call placed is not answered within the pre-programmed time interval.
In this example (Figure 5.20), calls not answered within 12 seconds will be
forwarded.
When both the Ring Time Limit and Call Forward No Answer features are
enabled, the ring time limit must be greater than, or equal to, the call forward no
answer limit to properly forward calls. If the ring time limit is reached before the
call forward time limit is reached, calls will not be forwarded.

System Clock Set
Figure 5.21: System Clock Set
Set the system clock. Enter the month, day, and year. The time must be entered in
24-hour time format. Requires the optional real time clock.
At 12:00 noon, the time is 1200. At at 1:00 P.M., the time is 1300. At 2:00 P.M.
the time is 1400. At 3:30 P.M., the time is 1530. If the time is 3:30 P.M., the user
will enter 15 to the hour category and 30 to the minute category.
Telephone Access
Figure 5.22: Telephone Access
A Cat. 4362 PBX Interface is required for telephone access.
Inbound
Access for incoming calls from an outside line is defined as follows:
• 0 = Disabled. The call will not be picked up.

• 1 = Admin Mode. The caller will have master-control level access to all
stations in the system.

• Extension = Specific Station. Incoming calls can be forwarded to a

specific station within the system by entering the extension for that
station in the Inbound field.
Outbound
The number entered here will be required for accessing an outside line. The
number of digits must be unique and consistent with the number of digits set for
station extensions.
Admin Night Mode
Figure 5.23: Admin Night Mode
Admin Night Mode allows one master to receive calls that would otherwise be sent
to a different master. This allows flexibility and increased coverage by allowing an
attendant at a different master to answer a call.
A system may have two master stations with two attendants during the day, but in
the evening, there is only one attendant on duty. Admin Night Mode allows one
master to take calls from all stations, regardless of which master they normally
report to, so that all calls placed on the system are managed by a single attendant.
• Enter the keystroke 0940 at a master station to enable Day mode.

• Enter the keystroke 0941 at a master station to enable Night mode.
Admin Night Mode must be enabled in global attributes. If not, the LCD at the
master station will read, FEATURE DISABLED when trying to enter night
mode. An N will appear in the upper left corner on master station LCDs when
night mode is enabled.

Automatic Dialing Keys
Figure 5.24: Automatic Dialing Keys
By pressing a single button, substations connected to a PBX interface have the

ability to automatically dial telephone numbers.
Dialing keys (shown in table below) may be programmed to autodial a phone
number:
Dialing Keys Function

0-9 Enter telephone number
* Standard DTMF dialing tone
# Standard DTMF dialing tone
F Hook flash
Pause. Inserts a brief pause (approximately 1.5 seconds) to
P help ensure the number is entered slowly enough to be
accepted by the service provider.
Table 5.1: Dialing Key Functions
Number sequences may be entered using the characters in the table above. They
should be entered without spaces or other punctuation.
The number (847) 555-1212 is entered as 8475551212. Entering 847P555P1212

will insert pauses that may be sufficient to slow the dialing so the number is
understood by the receiving system.
Factory Defaults/Auto Setup
The Factory Defaults/Auto-Setup attributes are used to initialize the ECHO 460
communication system with default values once all connections have been made.

Figure 5.25: Factory Defaults/Auto Setup
Setting Function
No Change Auto-setup will not be invoked.
Erases current settings at all stations. Default
settings are restored. Extensions will be
Bulk Erase All Changes
automatically assigned for two master stations, and
all substations.
Auto-Assign Exts All Mstr Changes all station types to master and auto-assigns
Stations extensions to connected stations.
Assigns the first position a master station, then
Auto-Assign Exts All Sub assigns the remaining positions as substations that
Stations place standard calls to the master at the first
position.
Assigns the station at the first line position as a
Auto-Assign Exts 2 Master
master station. The remaining stations will be
+ Sub Stations
assigned as Sub. Without Cancel.
Reassigns LEDs on the direct select master to
Direct Select Master correspond to the correct stations in the system.
Reconfigure Master stations must be reconfigured any time the
station extensions have been changed.
Table 5.2: Auto Setup Attributes
When selecting for changes to be made, allow ample time for the system to
complete changes at all stations. Larger systems may require more time to
complete the changes, perhaps several minutes.

Talk/Listen Operation
Figure 5.26: Talk/Listen Operation
VOX
Communication direction is determined by the station with the higher of the two
input levels.
Two people are communicating with each other through connected stations.
Communication direction will be one-way from the station with the higher audio
level input to the station with the lower audio level input.
Push to Talk (PTT)

Communication is one-way from the master station at which the Talk button is
held down. PTT mode is for use with talk/listen substations.
When an audio connection is

established between a talk/
listen substation and a master
station, communication is
one-way from the substation
to the master.
When the Talk key is pressed

and held at the master
station, communication
changes in direction and is
now one-way from master to
substation.
When the Talk key is

released at the master
station, communication
returns to one-way from
substation to master.
Figure 5.27: PTT Mode of Operation

Local Attributes (Station Programming) ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Local Attributes (Station Programming)
Individual station attributes are programmable through Local Programming. Select

Local from the main window menu. The system will prompt you to select the
L-node to which the stations are connected.
Figure 5.28: Select Local Node
The L-node to which you attempt to connect must be online. If the L-node is not
connected, an error message will appear.
The Local Attributes screen will appear, allowing you to program individual
stations on the selected L-node.

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Local Attributes (Station Programming)
Current node and pair being programmed
General function and navigation buttons
Figure 5.29: Local Attributes
Navigation Buttons
<< Prev
Scrolls to the previous station on the L-node.
Next >>
Scrolls to the next station on the L-node.

Node/Pair Number
Figure 5.30: Node Pair Number
This displays the L-node to which stations are connected (See “System Nodes” on
page 5-3).
Extension Name/Assignment
Figure 5.31: Extension and Name Assignment
Each extension can be assigned a name. To assign a name to a station, enter the
extension number for that station in the Extension field, then enter a name for that
station in the Name field.
Station Type
Figure 5.32: Station Type
The station type determines the functions available at a given station. Each station
may be assigned only one type. The table below identifies these station types with
Federal Signal catalog numbers:

Station Type Federal Signal Catalog Number

Master E-MDS/E-MDSMG
Specialty ECHO-PAI, ECHO-BGM, ECHO-AIU, 4362
Sub. with Cancel E-DD1/E-DD2, E-SSMB1KR, 4342, 4343,
Sub. without Cancel E-SSMB1 , E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2, 4327, E-SSSB2
Talk/Listen Sub 4210, 4211, 4213, 4215, 4308, 4309
Caller ID ECHO-CID
Direct Select Master 5265
Table 5.3: Station Types
Volume
This parameter sets the audio output level for the sound and ring at each station.
The values range from 0 (softest) to 9 (loudest).
Figure 5.33: Volume
Sound
Sound volume is defined as the audio level of the speaker at the selected station.
Ring
Ring volume is defined as the volume of the ring tones at the master stations or the
volume of the tones at connected substations.

Privacy
Privacy has two different settings: one sets the mode, and the other sets the level of
privacy. Set the mode first, then the level of privacy.
Figure 5.34: Privacy
Privacy Mode
There are two modes for privacy settings: changeable and fixed.
Changeable
Privacy can be changed at any time using the 09491 command for a talk/listen sub,
or a master station can change its own current privacy setting by keying 092.
Fixed
While in Fixed mode, privacy can be changed with either the ECHO-SFW Administration
Program Software or at a master station in Installer mode.
Privacy Setting
Non-Private
Full, two-way audio is established upon connection.
Semi-Private
A connection is established, but the called station microphone is muted until it is
enabled by pressing the Talk key, or by going off-hook.
Full-Private
The station rings to announce a standard call. Audio is muted at the called station
until a call button (substation), or the Talk button (master station) is pressed, or
until the unit is taken off-hook.
Do Not Disturb
The station will appear busy to any station placing a standard call. Admin calls will
be queued by the system.

Master stations may be set to any of the four privacy settings. Substations may be
set to Non-Private or Semi-Private only.
Emergency All Call
The Emergency All Call feature provides simultaneous, one-way, priority, break-
in paging to all stations. Existing station-to-station intercom connections are
placed on hold during the emergency all call, and then are automatically
reconnected when the emergency all call is finished.
Figure 5.35: Emergency All Call
Disabled
Stations set to Disabled cannot receive or initiate emergency all calls.
Receive Only
Stations set to Receive Only can receive, but not initiate emergency all calls.
Place Only
Stations set to Place Only can initiate, but not receive an emergency all call.
Place + Receive
Stations set to Place + Receive can initiate and receive emergency all calls.

Group Assignment
Stations can be assigned to groups. There are eight groups to which stations can be
assigned. To assign a station to a group, check the box of the desired group.
Stations (PA page stations included) can also be assigned to multiple groups.
When a group page is initiated, a reminder will appear at master stations,
prompting them to reply by pressing the Talk button.
Figure 5.36: Group Assignment
All Call
An All Call provides simultaneous, one-way voice paging to all non-busy stations.
Program authorization is required. PA page stations may be included in the page.
An all call page will not preempt busy stations. Busy stations will not receive the
all call page, but will receive a reminder message. Non-busy master stations will
be prompted to reply and may do so by pressing the Talk button.
Figure 5.37: All Call
Disabled
Stations set to Disabled cannot receive or initiate all call pages.
Receive Only
Stations set to Receive Only can receive, but cannot initiate all call pages.
Place Only
Stations set to Place Only can initiate, but cannot receive an all call pages.
Place + Receive
Stations set to Place + Receive can initiate and receive all call pages.

ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software Local Attributes (Station Programming)
Single-Digit Speed Dial Assignments
Single-digit speed dial assignments allow the station to place a call or perform a
function by pressing a single key. Options for setting single-digit speed dial
assignments are different for master stations and substations.
Single-Digit Speed Dial (Master Station)
Single-digit speed dial assignments can be set to perform two operations:
• Dialing station extension numbers

• Performing multi-key functions
Once a speed-dial key has been set, no extensions can use that key number as the
initial number. Extensions starting with 6, 7, 8, or 9 could not exist in the system if
they are programmed for single-digit speed dial because dialing the first digit
would trigger their respective speed-dial assignments. (Example: Using
Figure 5.38 on page 5-29, if an extension was programmed as Extension 70, the
person dialing it would activate the speed dial feature for key #7 and would be
connected to extension 12.)
Single-digit speed dial settings cannot be changed by the user.
Set an Extension
Enter a valid extension number in the Key field. In this example, key #7 will dial
extension 12.
Set a Function
Single digit dialing can be set to perform system functions. In this example, key #6
is set to dial 0951 which is the sequence to perform a group page for all stations in
Group 1. The maximum number of digits that can be entered here is four.
Figure 5.38: Single-Digit Speed Dial Master Station

Single-Digit Speed Dial (Substations)
Substations can be programmed to place standard or admin calls. The substation

depicted in Figure 5.39 is programmed to place two differently prioritized admin
calls to the same master station. The type of call the substation will place is
determined by the digits entered for each button. The details for setting substation
buttons to dial admin or standard calls are as follows:
Standard Call
Enter the extension of the station that will be called when the button is pressed.
Admin Call
A four-digit number is entered to dial an admin call. Using Button #1 from
Figure 5.39 as an example, the four-digit number is broken down as follows:
04 1 0
Designator for an Routine level call will
admin call display programmable
Ownership of master call text for call type 0.
station that will See “Call Text” on
receive this call page 5-52.
Places an admin call to master with

ownership of 1. Routine level call.
Places an admin call to master with

ownership of 1. Emergency level call.
Inactive buttons
Figure 5.39: Single-Digit Speed Dial Substation
If an analog substation is programmed to place a routine level call only

(Button#1: 0410) and not an emergency level call (Button #2 is not used), enter
0410 also in the Button #2 field.

Partition
Select the partition for this station. Master stations are able to communicate with
other master stations and substations within a partition only. Master stations that
are assigned partition 0 may communicate with any master or substation in the
system. The default setting is partition 1.
Figure 5.40: Partition
Preempt
The Preempt feature allows a master station to interrupt an existing connection.
Figure 5.41: Preempt
Disabled
The preempt feature is disabled.
Inbound Only
Default setting. A station that is set to Inbound Only can be preempted by another
authorized station, but cannot preempt other stations.
Outbound Only
Master stations only. A station set to Outbound Only is allowed to preempt other
stations set to Inbound. It cannot be preempted.
Inbound + Outbound
Master stations only. A station set to Inbound + Outbound can preempt another
station and can be preempted by another station.

Administrative Master
This option allows the user to set a master station to capture calls sent to a different
master station while in night mode. Master station 1, depicted in Figure 5.42, will
take calls directed to master station 2 in addition to its own calls while Night Mode
is active.
Figure 5.42: Administrative Master Night Mode Settings
Settings
• 0 = Disabled
• 1-8 = Administrative master address. It will receive calls from substations
with matching address
• 9 = Master will receive admin calls from all connected substations
Administrative master Day/Night mode settings can be active only when the Admin
Night mode in global attributes is in the On position.
Day/Night mode can be set for master stations only.
Night and Day modes of operation can be set at an admin master as follows:
• Day Mode: key 09494
• Night Mode: key 09495

Two-Digit Speed Dial Assignments
The two-digit speed dial assignment feature is programmable for two different
operations:
• Speed dialing of extensions using a two-digit keystroke operation

• Programming masters to receive calls sent to other masters using Call
Forward No Answer
Programmed to
dial extensions
1811, 1812, &
1813 using two
digits only.
Call Forward No Answer setting. In this case,

unanswered emergency calls will be forwarded
to a master station with ownership of 3 and
routine calls will be forwarded to the master
station with ownership of 2.
Figure 5.43: Two-Digit Speed Dial Assignments
Figure 5.43 on page 5-33 illustrates that speed dialing has been assigned for
keystrokes 01, 02, and 03. When the user enters any of these two digit extensions
as shown in Figure 5.43, the extension programmed for the key assignment will be
dialed.
Two-digit speed dialing can also be set while connected to a station by pressing the
two-digit speed dial number.
Extensions 1110 (master) and 1811 (talk/listen substation) are connected. The
operator at extension 1110 can press 01 while connected with station 1811. The
LCD at the master will read SPEED DIAL SET. The ECHO-SFW software will
reflect the change in the Two-Digit Speed Dial Assignments box (Figure 5.43). The
extension may also be removed from speed dial during a connection. While
connected to station 1811, the user at master, extension 1110 would key 01. The
LCD will read REMOVED and extension 1811 will no longer be programmed as
the two-digit speed dial extension for keypress 01.

Call Forward No Answer (Admin Calls)
Settings in the Call Forward No Answer feature allow one master station to receive
calls that were originally designated for a different master station. This allows calls
sent to an unattended master to be forwarded to an attended master station. Two
conditions must exist for calls to be forwarded to a second master station:
• The Call Forward No Answer value must be set in global attributes

(Figure 5.20 on page 5-16).
• The appropriate code must be entered in the Speed Dial Assignment Bin
for 08 (Figure 5.43 on page 5-33).
Call Forward No Answer settings must be programmed into Two-Digit Speed Dial
bin #08 only. Call Forward No Answer settings programmed into any other bin
will not allow the feature to function.
In the example illustrated by Figure 5.43 on page 5-33 the number programmed
into bin #08 is 0032. Figure 5.44 on page 5-34 illustrates the significance of the
numbers programmed in Two-Digit Speed Dial Bin #08.
00 3 2
Ownership of master to Ownership of master to

Call Forward No
receive forwarded receive forwarded
Answer designation
emergency level calls routine level calls
Figure 5.44: Call Forward No Answer Bin #08 Settings
In this example, emergency calls that are unanswered at this master station within
the Call Forward No Answer limit, will be forwarded to master stations with
ownership of 3. Routine calls that are unanswered at this master station within the
time limit will be forwarded to the master station with an ownership of 2.
Forwarded calls will appear at both the master to which they were forwarded and
the master to which the call was originally placed. An attendant can answer a call
at any master station where that call is displayed.
In a system with multiple masters assigned to the same ownership, only one of
those masters needs to be programmed to forward calls. It is not necessary to
program each master within that particular ownership to forward calls.

Call Forward No Answer for Standard Calls
Standard calls may be forwarded when the Call Forward No Answer time limit has
been exceeded. The station that will be forwarding calls must be set to Full-
Private.
To designate an extension to receive forwarded standard calls, enter that extension
number into 08 in Two-Digit Speed Dial settings.
Standard calls that are not answered

within the Call Forward No Answer
time limit will be forward to the
station extension programmed into
bin #08.
The forwarding master must be in

Full Private mode.
Standard calls are programmed to forward to

the station programmed as extension 1210
Figure 5.45: Call Forward No Answer for Standard Calls
A Call Forward No Answer destination can also be set at the station by the
following procedure:
1. The master forwarding standard calls must connect with the master to which
standard calls will be forwarded.
2. During the connection, the forwarding master will key 08.
3. The receiving master's extension is now entered into Speed Dial Bin 08.
The Ring Time Limit value must be greater than the Call Forward No Answer
value for calls to be forwarded. For details, see “Time Limits” on page 5-14.

Backup/Restore Global and Local Attributes ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software
Backup/Restore Global and Local Attributes
Restore Global Backup Local

Attributes Attributes
Backup Global Restore Local

Attributes Attributes
This application allows you to backup global and local attributes by saving the
configuration to a file. If necessary, the file can be opened and applied using the
Restore feature.
Backup/Restore Global Attributes
Backup Global Attributes will save a file with the configuration for the system.
Select the Backup Global Attributes icon. When the Save As dialog box appears,
enter a file name. Pressing Save will begin the backup process. To save over an
existing global backup file, select the file to save over. That file will appear in the
file name box. Press Save to overwrite the file.
Restore global attributes by first selecting the Restore Global Attributes icon,
and then selecting a backup file from the Open dialog box.

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Backup/Restore Global and Local Attributes
Files currently
saved as backup
files.
Global files have the

extension “.glb”
Saved backup files

can be opened to
restore global
attributes
Figure 5.46: Backup/Restore Global Attributes
Do not modify files created by the backup/restore process as it may cause

inconsistent operation.

Backup/Restore Global and Local Attributes ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software
Backup/Restore Local Attributes
Backup of local attributes will save a file with the configuration for each
connected station. Select the Backup Local Attributes icon, then choose a file
name. Press Save to begin the backup process.
Restore local attributes by selecting Restore Local Attributes icon, then selecting
a file from the list of backup files in the Open dialog box.
Since local files are specific to each station, backup may take several minutes as
the system is saving individual station files. Systems with a greater number of
connected stations will take a longer time to backup.
Current backup
files.
Local files have the

extension “.loc”
Saved backup files

can be opened to
restore local
attributes
Figure 5.47: Backup/Restore Local Attributes

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Diagnostics
Diagnostics
The diagnostic reporting of failed stations is available in ECHO-SFW version 1.05 or

greater and applies to ECHO 430/460 only. The Diagnostic Choice Dialog on ECHO-SFW
version 1.14 or greater offers in the ECHO 430 IP an option to view
information on system components. Select DIAG from the menu to view options in
the diagnostic category.
Figure 5.48: Diagnostic Choice Dialog
Display Failed Stations
Selecting Display Failed Stations will run a diagnostic check on the ECHO
430/460 System. This may take several minutes depending on the number of
connected stations. A report will be produced when the check is complete.

Diagnostics ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Figure 5.49: No Failed Stations
Figure 5.50: Failed Stations
Display Code Versions
When Display Code Versions is selected the following information will display
for ECHO 430/460 System:
• Number of communicating nodes

• Number of configured nodes
• Node
• Code version
• Dipswitch settings (when connected to a 430 system, settings for
dipswitches 1–4 will display. When connected to a 460 system, settings for
dipswitches 1–7 will display.)

The code version will display either the prefix D (default code) or U (update code)
Figure 5.51 displays the code version as D430. It is important to note whether the
code is default or update when identifying the code version.
Figure 5.51: Code Version Dialog

Configuration Verification
This diagnostic feature allows the user to quickly check for any errors and
inconsistencies in the programming on ECHO 430/460. Configuration
Verification checks both global and local configurations. The results of the
verification will appear on screen.
Figure 5.52: Configuration Verification Status
When Configuration Verification is complete, a screen will appear that lists all
results from the verification.
Figure 5.53: Configuration Verification Results
The results can be saved by selecting Save To File. The results will be saved as a
verification file (.vrf). Verification files can be opened and viewed using a word
processing program such as Microsoft Word, or a basic text program.

Figure 5.54: Save Configuration Verification Results
Station Data Quality
Select the Station Data Quality button to grade, on a pass/fail scale, the condition
of the line pairs for each configured station associated with a given digital switch
on ECHO 430/460. The line condition is reported for each line pair on a given
node. Once selected, a new dialog box will appear, offering a node selection dialog
box that allows the user to select the node (digital switch) whose line pairs are to
be graded.
Figure 5.55: Node Selection Box
Selecting a proper node, and then pressing the OK button will bring up the Station
Data Quality Report box. The results will be displayed as either pass or fail for a
given node or pair. Figure 5.56 illustrates that pair 17 in the system is failed.

Figure 5.56: Station Data Report
Pressing Update in the Station Data Quality Report box will rerun the test, and
display any status changes.
IP Component Status
The IP Component Status applies to the ECHO 430 IP System only, and is
provided in ECHO-SFW version 1.14 and greater. The component status report displays
the information on the devices that are operative. You may access the report after
you have programmed the IP system equipment. Refer to “IP Setup (430 IP
System Equipment Programming)” on page 5-59. You may use the report to
determine the devices that are inoperative and therefore, are missing from the
report by comparing it to your Worksheet or any other list of equipment.
Select IP Component Status for information on the IP system devices. A dialog
similar to the following displays.

Figure 5.57: IP Component Status Report
4. Click Ok to exit the report or click Save to File to save the report on your
computer for reference.

Program Code Update ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Program Code Update
The Program Code Update feature allows the user to upgrade the software in the ECHO
430/460 systems and does not apply to the ECHO 430 IP System.
Before invoking this feature, the user should have received the actual program
code file to update.
To ensure the reliability of the update process, save code update files to the hard
drive of the PC before updating.
This file has the form U?DXvvv.S19, where the '?' is a system identifier:
3 = ECHO 430 and 6 = ECHO 460, and the vvv is the three-digit version
number (i.e. 123, 124...).
Program code versions are specific to 430 and 460 systems. Code with a system
identifier of 3 can be uploaded to a 430 system only. Code with a system identifier
of 6 can be uploaded to a 460 system only. It is important to note whether the
system is running update code (denoted by U) or default code (D).
Select Code Update from the main window menu. A dialog box will appear
prompting you to select the file for upload.
Figure 5.58: Code Update

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Program Code Update
Choose the appropriate file to upload, and select Open. A warning dialog will
appear stating that during code upload the system will be non-operational.
Figure 5.59: Code Update Warning
At this screen, you will select Yes to continue and upload the code. The system
will be inoperative during the time that the code is being uploaded. Select No to
cancel the operation at this point.
If Yes is selected, a progress gauge will appear displaying the progress of the
upload. If No is selected, the you will be returned to the main window of the
application.
Figure 5.60: Code Upload Progress
A dialog box will appear indicating a successful code upload to the system.
Figure 5.61: Code Transfer Completed Successfully
When using a modem as a communications link, the connection will be dropped

after the program code update is complete. If the user wishes to continue using the

Function Keys ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
ECHO-SFWsoftware with the ECHO system, the communications link must to be

reestablished.
Function Keys
Programmable function keys allow single-touch feature activation when using the
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master. Seven keys are available for programming as
function keys on the E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Master (code version 1.01 or
greater is required in the E-MDS/E-MDSMG, and program code version 1.3.3 or
greater is required in the central exchange). In addition to being able to enter a custom
function, the following functions can be programmed as function key operations:
Available Functions for Function Key Operation

Emergency All Call All Call
PA Page Group Page
Manual Group Page Clear All Admin Calls
Hold Transfer
Conference Message Set
Change Remote Station Privacy Change Remote Station Volume
Sentinel Day Mode Sentinel Night Mode
Table 5.4: Programmable Function Key Operations
Select Function Keys to enter programming. Enter the extension number of the
direct select or admin master you wish to program.

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Function Keys
Figure 5.62: Select Admin Master for Function Key Programming
When you have selected the extension of the admin master for function key
programming, the ECHO-SFW software queries the ECHO 430/430 IP/460 system
about the entered extension. If the extension is not of an admin or direct select
master, an error message will be displayed. The function key programming dialog
box consists of several pieces of information, the current key being programmed, a
drop-down list of available user functions, and a detailed information window.
Figure 5.63: Main Function Key Window

Function Keys ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Figure 5.64: Drop-Down List of Functions
Figure 5.65: Operating Mode Selection
Figure 5.66: Group Station Destinations

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Function Keys
Figure 5.67: P.A. Page Destinations

Call Text ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Call Text
When a station places an admin call, call text is displayed at the annunciating
admin master station or at a master station programmed to receive admin type
calls. Call text can be customized using the ECHO-SFW application. Select Call Text
from the main window. The following dialog will appear:
Figure 5.68: Call Text
There are ten possible call types in the 430/430 IP/460 System (0 through 9). The
user can change any or all of the call text messages on this screen. There is an 11
character limit on a call text message. Select Update after entering text to send
changes to the 430/430 IP/460 system. Select Cancel to exit without saving
changes.

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Sentinel Sound Detector Substation
Sentinel Sound Detector Substation
This section allows programming of the Sentinel™ Sound Detector Substations.

Sentinel stations are available in two or three-gang models with a flush metal
activator button, or a red, mushroom-type button.
Button Type Cat. Number

Metal Activator Button 4308
Red Mushroom-Type Button 4309
Table 5.5: Sentinel Sound Detector Substations
Sentinel substations are designed to place admin calls, hands-free, upon detection
of a qualified audio event, which may be a shout, scream, distress signal, or any
sound that meets the qualification parameters programmed through ECHO-SFW
software. The substations are programmable from a central location. Stations with
pots and switches for programming qualifications are not acceptable. The
following values are programmable using the ECHO-SFW software:
• Day & Night Sensitivity Range (Fine adjustments)

• Sensitivity Range (Coarse adjustment)
• Low & High Frequency Cutoff
• Sound Event Qualification
• Extended Sound Reject Timer
• Ambient Adjust Time
• Call Window Time
• Number of Sound Detect Events
These parameters complement each other and help reduce the possibility that
erroneous calls are placed on the system.
The Sentinel station constantly monitors ambient noise conditions. When an audio
event occurs that is louder than ambient by at least the Day/Night Sensitivity
setting, a detection event starts to happen. When the system is set to Day mode, the
Sentinel Day settings are in effect. When the system is set to Night mode, Sentinel
Night settings are in effect.
Day/Night mode for the 430/460 system may be set using an admin master station.
Key 09494 for Day mode; key 09495 for Night mode.

Sentinel Sound Detector Substation ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Global Sentinel Programming
Figure 5.69: Select for Global Programming
Update All Sentinel Stations

The Global Sentinel Update screen allows fine adjustments to be made to
sensitivity. Sentinel stations are capable of operating in Day or Night modes of
operation. Day and Night sensitivity is set separately. Settings made at this screen
are global and will affect all Sentinel stations.
Pressing the Load Defaults button will return the system settings to their default
positions, regardless of any changes that have been previously made.
Figure 5.70: Global Sentinel Update Screen
Day and night sensitivity adjustments are made by using the slider controls. The
numeric range is 0 (most sensitive) to 128 (least sensitive).

Advanced Settings
Detailed adjustments can be made by selecting Advanced. The following screen
will appear:
Figure 5.71: Sentinel Advanced Settings Screen
Sensitivity Range Adjustment

This area is for making coarse adjustments to sensitivity. Fine adjustments should
be made on the Global Sentinel Update screen (Figure 5.70 on page 5-54). If the
sound you wish to detect is outside of the range of that may be set on the Global
Sentinel Update screen, then proceed to Advanced Settings.
• Set from 0–32 (least to most sensitive)

Frequency Adjustment
Frequency adjustment must be set for both the low and high cutoffs.
• Low cutoff range is 300Hz-7200Hz.

• High cutoff range is 500Hz-7400Hz
Only sounds within the programmed range will qualify.
Low Frequency Cutoff must be set to a lower number than High Frequency Cutoff.
An error message will display if the low frequency cutoff value is set to a higher
level than that of high frequency cutoff.
Sound Event Qualification

When a sound is detected at a station, a qualification timer begins. If the sound
exists for at least the amount of time set in this field, then the sound continues to be
treated as a possible qualified audio event. If the sound ends prior to this value, it
will not become a qualified audio event.
• Set from 0.032–8.160 seconds

Timer begins when the sound event is first detected.
Call Window Time

The Call Window Timer begins when a detection event occurs. It defines the
window of time in which the given number of audio events must occur to place a
call. This parameter is used when the number of detection events is set above one.
See Figure 5.71 on page 5-55
The number of Sound Detect Events is set to 2. The Call Window Time value is set
to 5.504 seconds. A call will be placed only if two sound events are detected
within the 5.504 second call window time. If two events are not detected within the
5.504 second call window time, the event will be discarded and a call will not be
placed.

Extended Sound Reject Time

An audio event that continues beyond the Extended Sound Reject Time will be
discarded.
In a parking garage, a siren may be detected and qualify as an audio event. The
siren reaches the Sound Event Qualification time (0.096 seconds according to
Figure 5.71 on page 5-55) and the timer begins. The siren continues above ambient
noise levels beyond the time set as the Extended Sound Reject Time (4.160
seconds according Figure 5.71 on page 5-55). The siren will be discarded as a
qualified audio event and a call will not be placed.
Ambient Adjust Time

The Ambient Adjust Time determines how quickly the Sentinel station reacts to
changing ambient noise levels. If noise levels are expected to be constant (with
infrequent noise bursts of short duration), the ambient adjust time should be set to
a slower reaction time. If the ambient noise conditions are not constant, but
instead, highly variable, the Ambient Adjust Time should be set to a faster reaction
time.
A parking garage may have erratic noise levels. In such an environment, where
ambient levels rise and fall quickly, set the Ambient Adjust Time to a faster
reaction time to help prevent calls from being placed when the ambient levels rise
suddenly.
Another parking garage may have more stable ambient noise levels. The ambient
levels may remain fairly constant without the pedestrian and motor vehicle traffic.
In this situation, the Ambient Adjust Time can be set to a slower reaction time.
This will help ensure that an actual distress call is recognized and that a call is
placed.
• Set from 0.032 seconds (fastest reaction time) – 8.160 seconds (slowest
reaction time)
Number of Sound Detect Events

The number of audio events necessary to place a call is programmable. It defines
the number of qualified audio events that must occur within the call window for a
call to be placed.

If the number of sound detect events is set to 2, then two audio events must take
place within the call window time. If two audio events are not received by the
station within the call window time, no call will be placed.
• Set from 1–5 Sound Detect Events
Local Sentinel Programming
Enter the Local Programming to program destinations for the two call buttons of
the Sentinel station. Button #1 is the physical button of the station and button #4
places calls using sound detection technology. Destinations are programmable as
local station attributes.
Sentinel button
#1 is the physical
call button.
Sentinel button
#4 is activated by
sound detection.
Figure 5.72: Local Attributes Programming
Figure 5.73: Select for Local Programming

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software IP Setup (430 IP System Equipment Programming)
Local programming allows the user to program individual Sentinel stations. The
user will be prompted to enter the extension of the Sentinel station whose
parameters they wish to review.
Figure 5.74: Enter Sentinel Station Extension
The Global Sentinel Update screen (Figure 5.70 on page 5-54) and the Sentinel
Advanced Settings screen (Figure 5.71 on page 5-55) will be used for local
programming, but they will be for programming the Sentinel station extension
entered in the dialog box only.
IP Setup (430 IP System Equipment Programming)
An IP Central Exchange (Port A) and an IP Station Hub are linked by default with
preprogrammed IP Address source and destination. No programming is necessary
if you use one of each. You will need to change the IP addresses if you have more
than one IP Central Exchange and additional Station Hubs. Each IP Central
Exchange Port and Station Hub Port must have a unique IP Address.
You will use ECHO-SFW Program Software to establish associations between IP Station
Hubs and the IP Central Exchange(s) after required information (unique IP address
for each device) has been assigned to each device. Programming the equipment via
the IP Setup screen must be completed prior to the installation of the equipment
and prior to any additional feature programming. IP Setup is available in ECHO-SFW
version 1.14 or greater. Refer to “Cat-5 Network Basics for ECHO 430 IP
System Manual” for basic network setup information.

IP Setup (430 IP System Equipment Programming) ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Required Equipment
1. PC
2. Ethernet Crossover Cable
3. 4550 IP Central Exchange(s)
4. IP Analog or IP Digital Station Hub(s)
Connecting PC to Cat. 4550 IP Central Exchange

1. Connect the PC to the 4550 IP Central Exchange Port A (J2) or B (J3) via a
crossover cable.
2. Connect the Central Exchange to a power source.
Programming 4550 IP Central Exchange

1. Launch the ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software and click IP Setup.
Figure 5.75: Main Screen Navigation on ECHO-SFW
2. Click the Retrieve Status button. Certain fields are populated and a window
similar to the following appears.

Figure 5.76: Cat. 4550 IP Central Exchange Setup
Information in the greyed fields is fixed except for the Code Version and
Checksum, which may be updated. The IP address for the Central Exchange is
provided by the factory, however, you may want to assign a different IP address. If
you have more than one Central Exchange in the system, you will need to assign a
unique IP address to each Central Exchange. In the IP Address field, enter the IP
address of the Cat. 4550 IP Central Exchange Port A or Port B. Match the MAC
Address on the enclosure with the appropriate IP address. Refer to your
worksheet. Subnet Mask and Default Gateway are also factory furnished and are
relevant if routers are used in the facility. Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0. Default
Gateway: 0.0.0.0, which should be changed for routers. Obtain the information
from the facility’s IT department.
3. If routers are used, enter the subnet mask for each port.
4. If routers are used, enter the default gateway for each port.
5. Enter a name for the location where the Exchange will be mounted. You may
enter up to 16 characters. See Figure 5.76 for an example.
Up to three Station Hubs may be associated with each port on the Central
Exchange, Port A (J2) and Port B (J3). An IP address is assigned with shipment.
You may change the address.
6. Enter the IP addresses of each Station Hub associated with the Central
Exchange port. Match the IP address of the Central Exchange port to its
associated Station Hubs according to your worksheet.
7. Press the Program button to save the settings.
8. Repeat the steps if necessary for the other port. Refer to “Connecting PC to
Cat. 4550 IP Central Exchange” on page 5-60.

IP Setup (430 IP System Equipment Programming) ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
9. Repeat these steps if there are additional 4550 IP Central Exchanges in the
system.
Connecting PC to Station Hubs

1. Connect the PC to the Station Hub at the RJ-45 port (J2) via a crossover cable.
2. Connect the Station Hub to a power source.
Programming IP Station Hubs

1. Press the Retrieve Status button if the ECHO-SFW program is open or launch the
ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software and choose IP Setup->Retrieve Status.
A window similar to the following appears.
Figure 5.77: Station Hub Setup
Information in the greyed fields is fixed except for the Code Version and
Checksum, which may be updated. The IP address is assigned by the factory,
however, you may want to assign a different IP address. If you have more than one
Station Hub in the system, you will need to assign a unique IP address to each
Station Hub. Subnet Mask and Default Gateway are also factory furnished and
will be relevant if routers are used in the facility. Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0, which should be changed for routers. Obtain the
information from the facility’s IT department.

2. Enter the IP Address for the Station Hub. Match the correct IP address to the
MAC Address on the screen. Refer to your worksheet.
3. If routers are used, enter the subnet mask.
4. If routers are used, enter the default gateway.
5. Enter a name for the location where the Station Hub will be mounted. You may
enter up to 16 characters. See Figure 5.77 on page 5-62 for an example.
6. In the Central Exchange IP Address field, enter the IP address of the Central
Exchange port to which this Station Hub is associated.
7. Click on the Program button.
8. Repeat the above steps for each Station Hub in your system.
After you have finished programming the equipment, you may program the entire
system.

Troubleshooting/Error Messages ECHO-SFWAdministration Program Software
Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Any of the following series of screens may appear due to one or more system
problems. The failure of the application to communicate with the specified serial
port will cause a connection error message to be displayed. The probable cause of
this is an incorrect COM port specified in the File > Properties screen.
Figure 5.78: Connection Error
Failure to communicate with the 430/460 will cause the following to display:
Figure 5.79: Global and Local Attributes Error
Possible causes for this may include the following:
• The ECHO 430/460 system may not be powered up
a. Verify that the “heartbeat” LED is flashing
• A cabling problem exists between the PC and ECHO 430/460 central

exchange
a. Verify that the RS-232 cable connection to proper port on PC

b. Verify that the correct RS-232 cable is being used (straight 9 pin)
c. Several applications may be running simultaneously on the PC along
with ECHO-SFW Administration Application. Close all other applications
before launching ECHO-SFW.

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Inconsistent Entry Errors when Updating Global Attributes
The following error messages may be displayed when attempting to update the
global attributes, and may arise due to programming inconsistencies and/or invalid
entries.Verify the entry you have made is correct and within required parameters.
Figure 5.80: Ring Time Limit Error
Figure 5.81: Page Time Limit Error
Figure 5.82: Extension Digits Error

Figure 5.83: Emergency All Call Password Errors
Figure 5.84: Active Node Count Error
Figure 5.85: Page Reply Time Error

Figure 5.86: Message Tone Interval Error
Figure 5.87: Call Abandonment Time Interval Error
Figure 5.88: Call Forward No Answer Time Interval Error

Figure 5.89: System Clock Range Errors

PBX Interface Extension Digit Errors

The following error messages may appear while dialing inbound or outbound
extensions when using a PBX Interface. The text will vary slightly depending upon
the number of extension digits selected for the system. The user may enter the
single digit 1 in the Telephone Access-Inbound field regardless of the number of
extension digits the system is using.
Figure 5.90: Extension Digit Errors When Using PBX Interface
Entries for the automatic dialing keys must be numbers from 0-9, *, or #. These
keys represent standard telephone DTMF dialing tones. The letter F represents
Hook Flash, while P represents Pause (approximately 1.5 seconds).
Figure 5.91: Automatic Dialing Keys Entry Error

Inconsistent Entry Errors when Updating Local Attributes
The following error messages may be displayed when attempting to update local
attributes. Most of the errors are self-explanatory and arise due to programming
inconsistencies and/or invalid entries. Text regarding extension digits will vary
according to the number of extension digits set on a particular system.
Figure 5.92: Extension Digit Error
Figure 5.93: Sound/Ring Volume Range Error
Figure 5.94: Partition Range Error

Day/Night Mode Programming Errors

The following error messages will arise when the administrative master day or
night ownership values are not set within program limits.
Figure 5.95: Day/Night Mode Range Errors
Errors When Using a Modem as the Communication Link

When using a modem as a communications link one of several error messages may
appear. If a modem is selected from the properties dialog, then the user must enter
data into the Phone Number To Dial and Password edit boxes. If either edit box is
empty, then the following error message will display:
Figure 5.96: Missing Phone Number/Password Error
Figure 5.97: Modem Login Error

If the phone connection is terminated, the following error message will appear:
Figure 5.98: Phone Connection Terminated
The following error message indicates that the attempt to connect to the ECHO
system using the modem has failed.
Figure 5.99: Modem/ECHO System Connection Error
If there is a data problem during a program code update procedure, the following
errors message will appear. If these messages appear, the update did not take effect
and the update procedure must be performed a second time.
Figure 5.100: Program Code Update Errors

430 IP-Specific Errors

Failure to communicate with a device that needs programming may display the
following error messages:
Figure 5.101: IP Device Communication Error
Possible causes for these messages may include the following:
• The device may not be powered up
a. Verify that the red “heartbeat” LED is flashing
• A cabling problem exists between the PC and the device.
a. Verify that you are using a crossover cable
• Device is in Boot Loader Mode and doesn’t have valid code.
a. Verify that the Orange LED illuminates steadily. If it flashes quickly, the
device is in Boot Loader Mode.
• Device Failure


.
Installer Mode Programming Introduction
Introduction
The central exchange has two modes of operation, the Run Mode and the Program
Mode. The Run Mode is used to execute all signal and call operational features.
The Program Mode is used to review or change the operating features of the
Central Exchange. The Program Mode is password protected and may be accessed
from any master station. Access to the Program mode may be disabled using
dipswitch settings in the digital switch. Programming may be done by using a
master station, or by using the ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software.
Program Protection
All programmable system data is retained in non-volatile, solid-state memory.

Reprogramming is not necessary in the event of a power failure.
Program Worksheets
Worksheets are provided for documenting wire pair color codes, station location,
and line card connection location. These sheets are useful for installation and
troubleshooting. Recording detailed information on the worksheets will help to
speed installation and will assist you and technical support personnel in
troubleshooting.
Auto-Assign Programming
The exchange is now ready to be programmed. In order for stations to
communicate and to perform the system check, address extension numbers must
be assigned to each station. As each station is attached to a station line it is
automatically assigned an extension number (the default is two digits). Only one
station may be attached to a station line. There are three categories of stations
which may be attached to a central exchange:
Master Stations
A master station has a complete dialing keypad and an LCD display. Each master
station requires a non-zero address extension number.
Substations
A substation has a limited number of call buttons and no LCD. Each substation
requires:
• A non-zero address extension number
• A destination address extension or admin code number for each call button
on the station
• The station type must be assigned as a Substation if All Master Program
option is selected

Introduction Installer Mode Programming
Specialty Stations
A specialty station is used as an interface between the central exchange and third
party equipment such as PA page or program music distribution sources. Each
specialty station requires a special extension number. The station type must be
specified as Specialty if All Master Program option is selected.
Basic Programming Options

This section describes quick-start programming options to auto-assign values that
allow system checkout of basic operation (place and receive calls). The exchange
has three built-in options for auto-assignment of basic required values.
All Master Exchange
In an exchange that is predominantly master stations, the exchange will

automatically assign extension numbers the master stations. All other station types
will require manual programming for complete activation. This is the default
option.
All Substation Exchange
For a substation dominant exchange with no administrative masters, the exchange

can auto-assign station type as: Substation with No Cancel, address extension
number and a fixed destination extension for a standard call to 10, or the first
station. This would allow each substation to place standard calls to one destination
to facilitate system check-out. All other station types will require manual
programming to for complete activation.
All Substation Exchange with Admin Master
For a substation dominant exchange that reports to one or more administrative

master, the exchange can auto-assign the station type as Substation with No
Cancel, the address extension number, and a fixed destination extension for an
admin call to 0410. This would allow all substations to place admin calls to one
administrative master connected to position 1 of digital switch 001 to facilitate
system check-out. All other station types will require manual programming for
complete activation.

Installer Mode Programming Basic Programming Procedure
Basic Programming Procedure

All-Master Exchange
Two digit extension numbers are automatically assigned for each attached station.
When the information in this table is matched with the installer worksheet data on
station location it can be used to prepare an extension directory.
Master stations are now fully functional for placing/receiving calls using the auto-
assigned extension numbers. The default values have been loaded for all features
except extension directory names, which may be added after system check-out is
complete
Systems with substations, administrative masters or special stations will require
additional programming.
All-Substation Exchange
This procedure is to be used when there are no admin masters.
1. Verify that the Program mode dipswitch is enabled.

2. From an idle master station, key 090, and when prompted enter the password:
“1743”. The station will now be in the V (global) section of the Program mode.
3. Press V+ or V- until the Reset Memory screen is displayed.
4. Press the 3 key to select S;
a. Extensions are assigned for all stations.

b. Station type changed to Substation with No Cancel Button.
c. Call button #1 destination is assigned extension 10.
Two digit extension numbers are automatically assigned for each attached station.
When the information in this table is matched with the installer worksheet data on
station location it can be used to prepare an extension directory.
Substations are now fully functional for placing/receiving calls using the auto-
assigned extension numbers. Button #1 on all substations will call to station 10.
Default values have been loaded for all features except extension directory names
which may be added after system check-out is complete.
Systems with master stations, administrative masters or special stations will
require additional programming. Master stations will speed dial to station 10 when
digit 1 is pressed until their station type has been reprogrammed from sub to
master.
It is recommended that a master station be connected to station location 1
(extension 10) on the line card for substation checkout.

Installer Mode Programming Installer Mode Programming
All Substation Exchange with Administrative Master

1. Verify Program mode dipswitch is enabled.
2. From an idle master station, key 090 and the password 1743.
3. The station will now be in the V (global) section of the Program mode.
4. Press either V+ or V- key until the Reset Memory screen is displayed.
5. Press the 4 key to select A
a. Extension assignment for all stations.

b. Station type changed to: Substation with No Cancel Button.
c. Call button #1 destination assigned extension: 0410.
d. Line card location #1 is configured as master #1
Two-digit extension numbers are automatically assigned for each attached station.
Record the assigned extension numbers on the installer worksheets.
Substations are now fully functional for placing and receiving calls using the auto-
assigned extension numbers. Button #1 on all substations will place an admin call
to administrative master with ownership of 1. Default values have been loaded for
all features except extension directory names which may be added after system
check-out is complete.
Systems with standard master stations, or specialty stations will require additional
programming. Master stations will speed dial to administrative master 1 when digit
1 is pressed, until their station type has been reprogrammed from substation to
master.
It is recommended that a E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master station be connected to
station location 1 (extension 10) on the line card for substation checkout.

This section describes the method used to manually program feature values for
each station.
Connecting a Master Station for Programming

Connect a master station to any unused pair on the line card. Global V mode
programming for the entire exchange may be completed from this node as well as
local D mode programming for the stations connected to the digital switch. Follow
the step-by-step procedures in “Manual Programming with a Master Station” on
page 6-6. Note: only one station may be connected to a line pair.
Manual Programming with a Master Station

Verify that the Program mode dipswitch is enabled
From an idle master station, key 090, then enter 1743. The station will now be in
the global section of the Program mode.

Global Attributes
Global attributes are common to each station in the exchange. Global options such
as time limits, extension digits, and system clock settings are found in the global
attributes. Changes made here will affect all stations in the system.
Local Attributes
Local attributes affect individual stations. Local station attributes are accessible by
using the D keys on the master station. While in local programming, you will be
able to review and change attributes for individual stations.
To switch from global programming to local programming when using a master
station, press DK or DL. To return to global programming, press V+ or V-.
To exit at any time press the X key. The station will time out and exit out of the
Installer mode if there have been no entries made on the keypad within one hour.
Program Mode Keystroke Summary
Key Description
090 Access Program mode
1743 Default password
X Exit Program mode
Global Program Mode
V+, V- Select next menu option
DK, DL Change from global to local programming
Local Program Mode
DK Select next station number for review or change
T Select next menu option
0–9 Scroll through choices in menu options
V+, V- Change from local to global programming
Table 6.1: Keystroke Summary

Global Programming
After entering 090 and 1743 the following screens will display:
Version
VER.=U430:Y.Y.Y
C=AA P=BB
This is the initial screen of the installer mode. The following information is
displayed on this screen:
• System Type (shown as U430)
• Code Version (shown as Y.Y.Y)
• Number of Connected Stations (shown as AA)
• Number of Programmed Stations (shown as BB)
No entries can be made on this screen.
To continue viewing screens in the global mode, press V+ to scroll. The following
screens will appear:
Digital Switch
DIGITAL SWITCH
COUNT(1)=1
• (1) = Number of connected central controls

• 1 = Number of programmed central controls
No entries can be made at this screen.
T/L Operation
T/L OPERATION
(0=VOX,1=PTT)
The mode for talk/listen operation is set at this screen.

• VOX = Direction of communication switches automatically.
• PTT = Push to Talk mode. The operator will initiate the voice
communication to another station by pressing and holding the T key to talk.

Auto Dial Phone Number
AUTO DIAL PHONE#

XXXX
Auto Dial Phone Number allows a substation with no numeric keypad the ability
to dial an outside telephone number when using the Cat. 4362 PBX Interface.
Inbound Extension
INBOUND EXT.
XX
When using a 4362 PBX Interface, this is the extension that will ring when an
outside telephone calls into the ECHO system. This section is also used for
setting Inbound Mode #2.
Phone Access Out
PHONE ACCESS OUT

XXXX
If using a 4362 PBX Interface, this is the extension to be dialed for access to an
outside telephone line.
Real Time Clock Settings
If the ECHO-CID Real Time Clock is installed on your system, the following screens
allow you to set the clock:
SET CLOCK MINUTE

(0-59)=0
SET CLOCK HOUR

(0-23)=0
SET CLOCK YEAR

(0-3999)=0

SET CLOCK DAY

(1-31)=0
SET CLOCK MONTH

(1-12)=0
Admin Night Mode
ADMIN NIGHT MODE

(0=OFF,1=ON)=0
Admin Night Mode is a setting applicable to E-MDS/E-MDSMG Admin Masters. Admin

Night Mode allows an admin master to take ownership of stations that report to a
separate master.
No Answer Call Forward
NO ANS CALL FWD

(0,1-99SEC)=12
enabled, the ring time limit must be equal to or greater than the call forward no
call forward time limit is reached, calls will not be forwarded.
Call Abandonment
CALL ABANDONMENT
(0,1-99MIN)=3
Call abandonment defines the amount of time that elapses before a substation
without a cancel button will be reset to idle. The settings are as follows:
• 0 = Off (station will not reset automatically)
• 1–99 = Number of minutes that will elapse before station is reset to idle
• Default setting is three minutes

Extension Digits
EXTENSION DIGITS
(2-4)=2
This defines the number of extension digits

Two, three, and four digit extensions can be assigned as follows:
• Two-digit extension range is 10–99
• Three-digit extension range is 100–999
• Four-digit extension range is 1000–9999
Individual station extension numbers are determined by line card location within
the specified ranges. Refer to “Auto Assigned Extensions” on page 6-15.
If two-digit extensions are assigned, the maximum number of master and

substations that may be connected is 90. Line card locations 91 through 96 do not
have dialable extensions in the two-digit mode. These locations may still be used to
support specialty stations.
Emergency All Call Password
EMER AC PASSWORD
(0=OFF,10-99)=0
Emergency all call preempts all connections. This screen allows a password to be
set that must be entered before an emergency all call will be placed. The settings
are as follows:
• 0 = No password is required
• 10–99 = Number entered will be password for placing an emergency all
call

Reset Memory
RESET MEMORY
(1Y,2E,3S,4A)=0
Options for resetting memory are listed below:

• 0 = Default setting. No changes will be made to configuration.
• 1 = Erases all current settings at all stations.
• 2 = This is for an all-master station system.
a. Two-digit extensions will be assigned
b. The station type will be changed to Master.
• 3 = This is for an all-substation exchange with no admin masters
a. Extension numbers are automatically assigned for all stations.

b. Station type is changed to Substation with no Cancel.
c. Call button #1 destination is set to station 10, 101, or 1001 (depending
on number of extension digits assigned globally. Station on the first
position of the first line card is configured as an admin master station.
• 4 = This will set an all-substation exchange with one admin master
a. Extension numbers are auto-assigned for all stations.

b. The station type will be changed to Substation with no Cancel
c. Call Button #1 destination is set to 0410.
d. The station on the first position of the first line card is configured as an
admin master station.
Message Reminder
MESSAGE REMINDER
(0,1-10MIN)=1
The message reminder tone will sound periodically when there is a message on the
system. Settings are as follows:
• 0 = Message reminder is disabled
• 1–10 = Sets a time interval in minutes
• Default setting is one minute

Answer Back Time
ANSWER BACK TIME

(0,1-10MIN)=2
Answer back time is defined as the amount of time a station has to reply after an all
call or group call. The settings are:
• 0 = No time limit
• 1–10 = Time limit in minutes
• Default setting is 2 minutes
Ring Time Limit
RING TIME LIMIT

(0,1-99SEC)=25
Ring time limit is the amount of time that a station set to full privacy will ring. The
settings are:
• 0 = No limit
• 1–99 = Time limit in seconds
• Default setting is 25 seconds
enabled, the ring time limit must be equal to or greater than the call forward no
call forward time limit is reached, calls will not be forwarded
Page Time Limit
PAGE TIME LIMIT

(0,1-99SEC)=10
This limits the duration of a page (group call, all call, PA page, or emergency all
call). Settings are:
• 0 = No time limit
• 1–99 = Time limit in seconds
• Default value is 10 seconds

Tone Enable
TONE ENABLE
(12345)=1
Tone enable activates or deactivates signal tones at all stations. Combinations of

the multiple tones can also be programmed.
Pre-Announce (1)
A two-tone sequence indicating a point-to-point audio connection between two
stations
Repetitive (2)
A tone sounds periodically to alert that:
• A message has been placed on the system
• A call is currently camped-on
• Talk/listen substations are being monitored
Call Assurance (3)

Call assurance activates a two or three-tone sequence at a calling substation to
indicate a successful admin or standard call has been placed.
Page Pre-Announce (4)

A page pre-announce tone activates a tone-sequence at all stations to indicate the
presence of a group page, an all call page, or an emergency all call.

Auto Extension Assignment
Extension Extension
Sta. 2, 3, and 4 digit Node-Pair Sta. 2, 3, and 4 digit Node-Pair Line Card
1 10 101 1001 001-01 49 58 201 1101 002-01
2 11 102 1002 001-02 50 59 202 1102 002-02
3 12 103 1003 001-03 51 60 203 1103 002-03
4 13 104 1004 001-04 52 61 204 1104 002-04
J1
5 14 105 1005 001-05 53 62 205 1105 002-05
6 15 106 1006 001-06 54 63 206 1106 002-06
7 16 107 1007 001-07 55 64 207 1107 002-07
8 17 108 1008 001-08 56 65 208 1108 002-08
9 18 109 1009 001-09 57 66 209 1109 002-09

10 19 110 1010 001-10 58 67 210 1110 002-10
11 20 111 1011 001-11 59 68 211 1111 002-11
12 21 112 1012 001-12 60 69 212 1112 002-12
J2
13 22 113 1013 001-13 61 70 213 1113 002-13
14 23 114 1014 001-14 62 71 214 1114 002-14
15 24 115 1015 001-15 63 72 215 1115 002-15
16 25 116 1016 001-16 64 73 216 1116 002-16
17 26 117 1017 001-17 65 74 217 1117 002-17

18 27 118 1018 001-18 66 75 218 1118 002-18
19 28 119 1019 001-19 67 76 219 1119 002-19
20 29 120 1020 001-20 68 77 220 1120 002-20
21 30 121 1021 001-21 69 78 221 1121 002-21
J3
22 31 122 1022 001-22 70 79 222 1122 002-22
23 32 123 1023 001-23 71 80 223 1123 002-23
24 33 124 1024 001-24 72 81 224 1124 002-24
25 34 126 1026 001-26 73 82 226 1126 002-26

26 35 127 1027 001-27 74 83 227 1127 002-27
27 36 128 1028 001-28 75 84 228 1128 002-28
28 37 129 1029 001-29 76 85 229 1129 002-29
29 38 130 1030 001-30 77 86 230 1130 002-30
J4
30 39 131 1031 001-31 78 87 231 1131 002-31
31 40 132 1032 001-32 79 88 232 1132 002-32
32 41 133 1033 001-33 80 89 233 1133 002-33
33 42 134 1034 001-34 81 90 234 1134 002-34

34 43 135 1035 001-35 82 91 235 1135 002-35
35 44 136 1036 001-36 83 92 236 1136 002-36
36 45 137 1037 001-37 84 93 237 1137 002-37
37 46 138 1038 001-38 85 94 238 1138 002-38
J5
38 47 139 1039 001-39 86 95 239 1139 002-39
39 48 140 1040 001-40 87 96 240 1140 002-40
40 49 141 1041 001-41 88 97 241 1141 002-41
41 50 142 1042 001-42 89 98 242 1142 002-42

42 51 143 1043 001-43 90 99 243 1143 002-43
43 52 144 1044 001-44 91 * 244 1144 002-44
44 53 145 1045 001-45 92 * 245 1145 002-45
45 54 146 1046 001-46 93 * 246 1146 002-46
J6
46 55 147 1047 001-47 94 * 247 1147 002-47
47 56 148 1048 001-48 95 * 248 1148 002-48
48 57 149 1049 001-49 96 * 249 1149 002-49
Table 6.2: Auto Assigned Extensions

Local Station Programming

This section of the Program mode is used to individually program all stations
connected to station lines. The main station categories are:
• Administrative masters
• Master stations
• Substations
• Specialty stations
Each station category is unique and programmable attributes differ.
Enter Local Programming
After entering 090, then 1743 the following screens will display:
Version
VER.=U430:Y.Y.Y
C=AA P=BB
This is the initial screen of the installer mode. The following information is
displayed on this screen:
• System type (shown as U430)
• Code version (shown as Y.Y.Y)
• Number of connected stations (shown as AA)
• Number of programmed stations (shown as BB)
No entries can be made on this screen.
The system type will display as either D430 (default code running) or U430
(update code running). This is a very important identifier. If there is a need to call
technical support, verify whether the code version is default (D) or update (U). It
is absolutely essential that you provide the correct code version when requesting
support.
Press DK or DL to enter the local programming mode. The first screen that appears
is the local section for the station connected to the first line card position of the
associated digital switch.

Station Extension
001-01:EXTENSION
XX
Scroll through the list stations by pressing DL. When the station appears that you
wish to program press the T key to enter local attributes for that station. The first
screen that will appear is Station Name. Continue viewing the local attributes for
the station by pressing T. Press DL to continue to the next station.
Station Name
104: NAME
CONTROL DESK
Key the desired name for the station by using the numeric keypad to produce
letters according to the directory text conversion table. (e.g. To enter the name
“Control Desk”, you will key in 35 47 46 52 50 47 44 00 36 37 51 43.)
01 = ! 17 = 1 33 = A 49 = Q 65 = a 80 = p
02 = " 18 = 2 34 = B 50 = R 66 = b 81 = q
03 = # 19 = 3 35 = C 51 = S 67 = c 82 = r
04 = $ 20 = 4 36 = D 52 = T 68 = d 83 = s
05 = % 21 = 5 37 = E 53 = U 69 = e 84 = t
06 = & 22 = 6 38 = F 54 = V 70 = f 85 = u
07 = ' 23 = 7 39 = G 55 = W 71 = g 86 = v
08 = ( 24 = 8 40 = H 56 = X 72 = h 87 = w
09 = ) 25 = 9 41 = I 57 = Y 73 = i 88 = x
10 = * 26 = : 42 = J 58 = Z 74 = j 89 = y
11 = + 27 = ; 43 = K 75 = k 90 = z
12 = , 28 = < 44 = L 76 = l 96 = Clear Line
13 = 29 = = 45 = M 77 = m
14 = . 30 = > 46 = N 78 = n 99 = Back Space
15 = / 31 = ? 47 = O 79 = o
16 = 0 32 = @ 48 = P 00 = Space
Table 6.3: Directory Text Conversion

Station Type
104: STA. TYPE

MASTER
Select the station type:

• Master
• Specialty
• Sub. with Cancel
• Sub. without Cancel
• Talk/Listen Sub.
• Caller ID
• D.S. Master
Sound Volume
104: SOUND VOL

(0=LOW-9=HIGH)=0
Sound volume is defined as the audio level at the selected source. Values range
from 0 (softest) to 9 (loudest).
Ring Volume
104: RING VOL

(0=LOW,9=HIGH)=5
Ring volume is defined as the ring volume at the master station or the tone volume
at substations. Values range from 0 (softest) to 9 (loudest).
Default = 5

Privacy Settings
104: PRIVACY
CHANGEABLE
Privacy mode can be set to Changeable or Fixed.

• Changeable - Privacy can be changed using a master station.
• Fixed - Privacy must be changed using ECHO-SFW software.
Privacy Modes
104: PRIVACY
NON-PRIVATE
There are four settings in this menu option:
Non-Private
Full two-way audio is established upon connection.
Semi-Private
When an audio connection established, the called station’s microphone is muted
until it is enabled by pressing the Talk key or going off-hook.
Full-Private
The station rings to signify a standard call. Audio is muted until pressing the Talk
key or going off-hook.
Do Not Disturb
The station will appear busy to any station placing a standard call. Admin calls will
be queued by the system.

Emergency All Call
104: EM ALL CAL

PLACE & RECEIVE
The emergency all call feature provides simultaneous, one-way, priority, break-in
paging to all stations. Existing station to station intercom connections are placed
on hold during the emergency all call, and then automatically reconnected when
the emergency all call is finished.
Disabled
Stations set to Disabled cannot receive or initiate emergency all calls.
Receive Only
Stations set to Receive Only can receive, but cannot initiate emergency all calls.
Place Only
Stations set to Place Only can initiate, but cannot receive an emergency all call.
Place + Receive
Stations set to Place + Receive can initiate and receive emergency all calls.
Group Assignment
104: SELECT GRP

(1-8)
There are eight groups to which stations can be assigned. To assign a station to a
group, select the desired group. Stations can be assigned to multiple groups. PA
page stations can be included. When a group page is initiated, a reminder will
appear at master stations, prompting them to reply by pressing the Talk button.

All Call
104: ALL CALL

PLACE & RECEIVE
All call provides simultaneous, one-way voice paging to all non-busy stations. PA
page stations may be included in the page. An all call will not preempt busy
stations; busy stations will not receive the all call. Non-busy master stations will be
prompted to reply. A reply is sent by pressing the Talk button. All call pages will
not preempt an existing connection, but will leave a reminder to all busy stations.
All call settings are described below:
Disabled
Stations set to Disabled cannot receive nor initiate all calls.
Receive Only
Stations set to Receive Only can receive, but cannot initiate all calls.
Place Only
Stations set to Place Only can initiate, but cannot receive an all call.
Place + Receive
Stations set to Place + Receive can initiate and receive all calls.

Substation Buttons
Substation buttons can be programmed to place admin calls to master stations or to

place standard calls. A substation may be set to place a standard call by entering
the extension number for the station to be called with the button press.
Substations are commonly programmed to place admin calls to a master station
according to the following example:
04 1 0
Designation to place an Ownership of master Call text/priority level of

admin type call station that will receive call
the call
The number consists of designating the admin call, the station to which the call
will be placed, and the call text/priority assigned for the call. Call text/priority is
determined by the call type number. The following table depicts call text settings
and default messages that will appear at the LCD:
Call Type # Priority Default Call Text Locking/Non-Locking

0 Routine ROUTINE Non-Locking
1 Routine NORMAL Locking
2 Routine URGENT Non-Locking
3 Routine AUXILIARY Locking
4 Routine ALARM Non-Locking
5 Emergency ALARM Locking
6 Emergency EMERGENCY Non-Locking
7 Emergency CODE Locking
8 Emergency EMERGENCY 8 Non-Locking
9 Emergency EMERGENCY 9 Locking
Table 6.4: Call Text Detail
Call text messages are programmable using the ECHO-SFW Administration Program
Software. When programming this substation button, the LCD will appear as
follows:

104: BUTTON #1
(EXT/CALL)=0410
When a call is placed using button #1 of the substation, the LCD at the receiving
master station will appear as:
104 :ROUTINE
104: BUTTON #2
(EXT/CALL)=0418
Button #2 is programmed with the number 0418 which will allow it to place an
emergency level call to the master station with ownership of 1.
The three parts to this number are:
• 04 = Admin call
• 1 = Ownership of master station
• 8 = Emergency-level call that will display call text for call type 8 as
programmed using the ECHO-SFW software application
104: BUTTON #3
(EXT/CALL)=0
Button #3 is set to 0 and is disabled.
104: BUTTON #4
(EXT/CALL)=0

Master Station Buttons (Single-Digit Speed Dialing)
When programming a master station, buttons #1 through #4 are used for single-
digit speed dialing.
The buttons relate to single-digit speed dial keys as follows:
LCD Display Master Station Key

Button #1 #6 Key
Button #2 #7 Key
Button #3 #8 Key
Button #4 #9 Key
Table 6.5: Button/Master Station Key Relationship
104: BUTTON #1
(EXT/CALL)=105
Button #1 is programmed with the number 105. The attendant at the master station
can press the 6 key to establish an audio connection with station 105.
104: BUTTON #2
(EXT/CALL)=106
Button #2 is programmed with the number 106. The attendant at the master station
can press the 7 key to establish an audio connection with station 106.
If the extension numbering scheme uses extensions that begin with 6, 7, 8, or 9,

then single-digit speed dial keys will conflict with that assignment. (Example: If
the station numbering uses extensions that begin with 9 and the #9 key is assigned
as a single-digit speed dial key, then attempting to directly dial a station extension
will activate single-digit speed dialing instead of allowing the operator to dial the
station extension.)
104: BUTTON #3
(EXT/CALL)=0

104: BUTTON #4
(EXT/CALL)=0
Partitions
104: PARTITION
1
Specify the partition in the exchange that this station will be able to access.
Stations can only communicate with other stations according to the descriptions
below. Partitions can be assigned as follows:
• Partitions 1–49 restrict admin and standard calls. Stations within one of
these partitions can only place and receive calls to and from other stations
in the same partition (or Partition 0) for both admin and standard calls.
• Partitions 50–99 restrict admin only calls. Stations within one of these
partitions can place and receive a standard call to and from any partition
50-99, but admin calls are restricted to stations only within their given
partition (or Partition 0).
• Partition 0 is not restricted. Stations assigned partition 0 can place and
receive standard and admin calls across all partitions.
Partition 0 is commonly assigned as overseer to master stations, allowing them to
communicate with stations in any partition.
Preempt
104: PRE-EMPT
DISABLED
Disabled
The Preempt feature is disabled.
Inbound only
Default setting. A station that is set to Inbound Only can be pre-empted by
another authorized station, but cannot pre-empt other stations.

Outbound only
Master stations only. A station set to Outbound Only is allowed to preempt other
stations set to Inbound. It cannot be preempted.
In & Outbound
Master stations only. A station set to In & Outbound can preempt another station
and can be preempted by another station.
Admin Ownership
104: ADMIN OWN

(DAY/NIGHT)=0
Ownership settings apply to admin masters. Settings at this menu option are:
• 0 = Off
• 1–8 = Admin master address
• 9 = Receives admin calls from all substations within a partition
An admin master’s ownership may be set differently for Day and Night modes of
operation. This feature allows an admin master to receive the calls placed by a
substation that normally reports to a different admin master.
104: ADMIN OWN

(DAY/NIGHT)=12
The admin master depicted here has 12 programmed as the Day/Night value. This
indicates that while the system is in Day Mode, the admin master will receive calls
from substations programmed to report to the admin master with ownership of 1.
While Night mode is enabled, this admin master’s ownership is 1 and 2.
When this value is set to 9, the admin master will receive admin calls from all
substations within its partition.
This feature applies only to systems with multiple admin masters.

Two-Digit Speed Dialing
Two-digit speed dial applies to master stations only.
104: SPD. BIN 01

(EXT)=108
An extension number can be entered that will be dialed when the two-digit
sequence is keyed (01 in this example). If the admin master depicted here dials 01,
it will be connected to the station with extension 108.
Bins 01–08 are available for two-digit speed dialing.
Specialty Station Extensions

Specialty stations must be assigned extensions according to the table below. It is
important that they are assigned sequential numbers (i.e. the first PBX Interface is
extension 0500, second is 0501, third is 0502) to allow the system to recognize
them.
Cat # Station Type Extension Quantity

0100–0109 (PA Page
ECHO-PAI PA Page 10 per partition
zones 0–9)
0200–0209 (Program
ECHO-BGM Program Distribution 10 per exchange
channels 0–9)
ECHO-AIU Audio Control 0700–0799
4362 PBX Interface 0500–0599
4363 Two-Way Radio 0600–0609 10 per exchange
Table 6.6: Specialty Station Extension Assignments

Cat. 4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substation Installer Mode Programming
Cat. 4211/13, E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2

High-Security Substation
Programming
Station Type
High-Security substations must be programmed as Talk/Listen Sub.
Call Button Assignment

The 4211/13 and E-SSMB1/13 are single-call substations. Program Button #1 with the
desired destination extension.
The E-SSSB2 is a dual-call substation. Program Buttons #1 and #2 with the desired
destination extension.

Programming
Programming for Sentinel substations is described in the chapter detailing ECHO-SFW
Administration Program Software. The Sentinel substation connects to a digital
line card position.
Station Type
The Sentinel substation must be programmed as a Talk/Listen Sub.
Call Button Assignment

Enter the local attributes programming section using the ECHO-SFW Administration
Software Application and program the call buttons of the Sentinel substation. In
the Substation Information box, you will program Button #1 (physical call button)
and Button #4 (sound detection).
The chapter on ECHO-SFW Administration Software Application contains more detailed

information on programming local station attributes.

Installer Mode Programming 4308/09 Sentinel Sound Detector Substation
Calibration
Because the Sentinel substation places calls by sound detection, it is important that
you take the time to properly calibrate it. Before beginning the calibration
procedure, pay careful attention to the following:
• Be aware of the Number of Sound Detect Events programmed for call

placement. This setting appears in the Sentinel Advanced Settings screen.
This is the number of events (shouts, screams, etc.) that must be detected
for call placement to occur.
• If possible, calibrate the station while typical ambient noise conditions
exist. If this is not possible, use an auxiliary noise source such as a radio ,
to help simulate expected ambient noise levels. Place the radio or other
noise generating device in the approximate area where you expect the
actual ambient noise to originate.
Procedure
1. Stand at the center of the area.
2. Shout “Help!” (Repeat as necessary to satisfy the number of audio detect
events required for call placement.)
3. A call assurance tone (chirp) will sound if the call was placed.
• If a call was placed, proceed to step 4.

• In no call was placed:
• Increase sensitivity at the Global Sentinel Update Screen.
• If sensitivity is set to maximum level (128) then click on the Advanced
button to increase the sensitivity level under Advanced Settings.
• Attempt to place the call again using the new settings.
• Continue to adjust sensitivity levels until a call is successfully placed.
• Upon successful call placement, proceed to step 4.
4. Repeat to verify results.
5. When station is successfully placing calls using voice detection, calibration is
complete.
Further adjustment may be necessary if there are a high number of nuisance calls
being placed. In some cases, it may be necessary to adjust other values using the
Sentinel Advanced Settings, but basic sensitivity adjustments will suffice in most
cases.

Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface Installer Mode Programming

Global Attributes
1. Key 090 then the password 1743 at a master station that is connected to the
digital switch with the PBX Interface.
2. Press V+ to Global attributes in Installer Mode programming.
3. Press V+ until you reach the Auto Dial Phone #
Enter the desired number using the conversion table below:
Numeric Special Characters

16 = 0 03 = #
17 = 1 10 = *
18 = 2 38 = Hook flash
48 = Pause (approx. 1
19 = 3
second)
20 = 4 96 = Clear
21 = 5 99 = Back
22 = 6
23 = 7
24 = 8
25 = 9
Table 6.7: Auto Dial Conversion
The number to be programmed is 17732751900.
You will enter the number by the conversion: 17 23 23 19 18 23 21 17 25 16 16.
4. Press V+ until you see the Inbound Extension LCD. Enter 1 for Mode 1
operation. Enter the appropriate station extension number for Mode 2
operation.
If “0” (zero) is entered as the Inbound Extension number, the PBX Interface will
not respond to incoming calls.
5. Press V+ to continue to Phone Access Out. Enter the extension for accessing
an outside line.

Installer Mode Programming Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface
Local Attributes
1. Scroll through LCD screens by pressing DK or DL to reach the station pair that
will be programmed as the PBX Interface.
2. Assign the extension number for the PBX Interface.
The first PBX Interface in the system must be programmed as extension 0500
regardless of the number of extension digits.
3. After assigning an extension number, press the Talk key to scroll through the
station attributes.
4. Enter a name for the PBX interface. Use the Text Conversion table to enter the
station name using the numeric keypad
Key in 48 34 56 17 to name the station "PBX1" by using the numeric keypad.
01 = ! 17 = 1 33 = A 49 = Q 65 = a 80 = p
02 = " 18 = 2 34 = B 50 = R 66 = b 81 = q
03 = # 19 = 3 35 = C 51 = S 67 = c 82 = r
04 = $ 20 = 4 36 = D 52 = T 68 = d 83 = s
05 = % 21 = 5 37 = E 53 = U 69 = e 84 = t
06 = & 22 = 6 38 = F 54 = V 70 = f 85 = u
07 = ' 23 = 7 39 = G 55 = W 71 = g 86 = v
08 = ( 24 = 8 40 = H 56 = X 72 = h 87 = w
09 = ) 25 = 9 41 = I 57 = Y 73 = i 88 = x
10 = * 26 = : 42 = J 58 = Z 74 = j 89 = y
11 = + 27 = ; 43 = K 75 = k 90 = z
12 = , 28 = < 44 = L 76 = l 96 = Clear Line
13 = 29 = = 45 = M 77 = m
14 = . 30 = > 46 = N 78 = n 99 = Back Space
15 = / 31 = ? 47 = O 79 = o
16 = 0 32 = @ 48 = P 00 = Space
Table 6.8: Text Conversion

5. Assign the PBX as a Specialty station.
6. Set station privacy to Fixed.
7. Verify that buttons #1–4 are not programmed to place admin calls.
Admin calls are recognized by leading digits of “04”. Verify that buttons are not
programmed to place admin calls. Buttons 1–4 can be programmed for feature
activation.
Verify that the Preempt feature is disabled.

ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface Installer Mode Programming

Local Attributes
1. Using a master station connected to the same Digital Switch as the CID
Interface, enter the Installer Mode by keying 090 then the password 1743.
2. Scroll through the LCD screens by pressing DK or DL to reach the station that
will be programmed as the CID Interface.
3. Assign an extension for the CID Interface. Number of extension digits must be
consistent with those set in global attributes.
4. After assigning the extension number for the CID Interface, press the Talk
button to scroll through station attributes.
5. Enter a name for the CID Interface using the text conversion table (see
Table 6.8 on page 6-31).
6. Change station type to Caller ID.

1. Enter Local Installer Mode at a master station that is connected to the same
node as the ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station.
2. Key 090 then the password 1743.
3. Press DL to scroll to the station with the pair number of the connected ECHO-ALM
Alarm Supervision Station.
4. Enter the station name using the text conversion table
(see Table 6.8 on page 6-31)
To enter the name “ALARM STATION” you will key in the following sequence:
33 44 33 50 45 00 51 52 33 52 41 47 46
5. Change station type to Master.

6. Select sound volume. (The jumper must be installed onto JP1 of the ECHO-ALM
Alarm Supervision Station for the speaker to be active.)
7. Set privacy mode to Fixed. (Stations set to Fixed have privacy changeable
using ECHO-SFW software only.)
8. Set privacy setting to Do Not Disturb.
9. Set emergency all call to Disabled.
10. Verify that the ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station is not assigned to a group.
11. Set All-Call to Disabled.
Press X to exit Local Installer Mode programming.

Installer Mode Programming ECHO-AIU Audio Interface
ECHO-AIU Audio Interface

1. Enter Local Installer Mode at a master station that is connected to the same
node as the ECHO-AIU Audio Interface.
2. Key 090 then the password 1743.
3. Press DL to scroll to the station with the pair number of the connected ECHO-AIU
Audio Interface.
4. Assign an extension for the Audio Interface. The first ECHO-AIU station extension is
0700. The second ECHO-AIU station extension is 0701, etc.
5. After assigning the extension number for the Audio Interface, press the Talk
button to scroll through station attributes.
6. Enter a name for the Audio Interface using the text conversion table (see
Table 6.8 on page 6-31).
7. Change station type to Specialty.
8. Set Privacy Mode to Fixed.
9. Set Privacy to Non-Private.
10. Set Em. All Call to Place Only.
11. Set Button #1 to 099 (Emergency All-Call) or 098 (All-Call) or 095x where x
1-9 (Group Call) or Called Station Extension.
12. Verify that buttons #2 through #4 are set to ‘0000’.
Press X to exit Local Installer Mode programming.
You may program the above stations also in the ECHO-SFW Administration Software
Program using the information provided herein.

ECHO-AIU Audio Interface Installer Mode Programming

Operation
.
Operation General Operation
General Operation
Keystroke Operation Summary
The functions described in this section apply to all master stations. Though some
of these functions may be programmed into the function keys of a master station,
functions are also available through numeric keypad operation.
Key Operation
0 + DK, DL Help menu
1 Hold
2 Call Transfer
3 Conference Call
4 Door Control at connected substation
5 Camp-on Busy
6 Unassigned
7 Leave Message
0 (1-7) Two-Digit Speed-dial pre-programmed station
8 (6,7,8,9) Add/Delete One-Digit Speed Dial
08 Call Forward-No Answer
9 Mute, Privacy
X Disconnect
T (after pressing D or 3) Connect to displayed station or Conference
T (while connected) Manual Speech Control (PTT Control)
T (while displaying busy) Preempt Break-in
T (while idle) Last number redial: call last caller
V +, V Volume Control: voice and ring, Help scroll
DK, DL Directory and Help scroll
091 Mobile Communications
0911 Radio Page
0912 Two-way Radio: select channel (0-9)

General Operation Operation
Key Operation
092 Privacy: select Non, Semi, Full or DND
093 Call Forward
094 Provider 680 Integration
095 Group Call: select group 1-9
096 PA Overhead Page: select 0-9
097 Program Distribution channel: select 0-9
098 All-Call
099 + Password Emergency All-Call
All Call with Reply

Key 098
All Call with reply allows one-way voice paging to all non-busy stations
simultaneously. Stations with the ability to reply will be prompted to reply by a
message displayed on the LCD.
Station displays: ALL CALL. An LCD message prompts called master stations
to reply by pressing the Talk button. When the Talk button is pressed, a reply call
will be sent to the station that originated the All Call. PA Page stations may be
included in the All Call Page.
Place a Call
An active station may be called by keying in the programmed two, three, or four-
digit extension number. The operator may also use speed dialing to connect to a
station programmed for speed dialing.
Station 1010 is an admin master programmed as MAIN OFFICE.

Station 1811 is a E-IST master programmed as LIBRARY.
To establish an audio connection to the library, the attendant at the main office will
key in 1811.
When 1811 is keyed, the LCD at station 1010, Main Office will read:
CALL TO 1811
LIBRARY

If extension 1811 is set to Full Privacy, then the LCD at the calling station will
read:
RINGING 1811
LIBRARY
The LCD at extension 1811 will read:
CALL FROM 1010

MAIN OFFICE
If the called station is in use, the calling station will display:
BUSY 1811
LIBRARY
Call Forward
Key 093 + Extension
After keying 093 the user will enter an extension to which all standard calls will be
immediately forwarded. The LCD will read: CALLS FORWARDED TO XX.
To terminate call forwarding, press X.

Key 08 (when connected)
A pre-programmed full privacy station, automatically redirects incoming calls to a
designated station when not answered in a preset time period. When setting up,
call to designated extension must connect before keying 08. Substation calls may
be forwarded off-premise through the Cat. 4362 PBX Interface.
Camp-On Busy
Key 05 (while displaying busy)
Master stations may camp on to a busy station. When a called station becomes
idle, it is automatically connected to the first station in the camp-on queue. A
maximum of eight different calls may be in the queue. The calling station

momentarily displays: CAMP-ON. At a busy station, the LCD displays: XXX

WAITING and a periodic audible alert tone sounds.
Call Last Caller/Last Number Redial

Key T (or Intercom Push to Talk on 5265 Direct Select Console)
While the station is idle, keying T or Intercom Push to Talk will call the most
recent extension to which this station was connected.
Clear All Admin Calls

Key 09490
This will clear all admin calls.
Conference
Conferencing requires a ECHO-RMCC Conference Card.
Key 3
A conference may be established through the following steps:
1. Connect to the first conferee by dialing the appropriate extension. Pressing the
conference digit 3 adds that conferee to the conference stack. (The originator is
not yet included as a member of the conference.)
2. Key in the extension of the next conferee and, after connecting, press 3.
3. Repeat this until up to four members are in the conference (not including the
originator). The number of current members is displayed at each conferee
station.
4. The originator will be the last to join the conference, and does so by pressing T.
The maximum limit is five members per conference (originator included).
Conference Rules
• Conference member limits
• 6 conferences with 5 members each

• 10 conferences with 3 members each
• Ten simultaneous conferences may be held with a maximum of 30 total

members.

• A conferee may disconnect at any time.

• When the originator disconnects, all members will be disconnected.
Limit Notices
When the maximum number of ten conferences has been reached and a new
conference cannot be started the LCD will display:
CONFERENCE LIMIT
When the member limit of five per conference has been reached and new members
cannot join the LCD will display:
MEMBER LIMIT
When the maximum of 30 links have been exceeded the LCD will display:
CHANNEL LIMIT
Directory Scrolling
Key DK, DL
While idle, keying the DK or DL allows the user to scroll through a name/number
directory of up to 20 previously entered station numbers with assigned names. The
currently displayed listing can be dialed by pressing T.
Directory Maintenance
Add or Remove Listings

When connected to a station, keying DK will add a new listing or remove an
existing listing. The display will read ADDED or REMOVED once the action
is completed.
Directory Capacity
The message DIRECTORY FULL will display on the LCD when the
directory has reached the maximum of 20 stations.

To add or remove names from the directory, a connection must be established to

the room that is to be added or removed.

Operation General Options
Disconnect
Key X
The functions of the X key are:
• To terminate the connection and return to idle status

• To cancel the previously selected feature
Door Control
Key 4
A master station can activate a remote contact at a connected substation by keying
4 when connected to that station. The LCD at the master station reads, DOOR
CONTROL.
The door control feature requires a substation equipped with a relay.
Emergency All Call

Key 099
The Emergency All Call provides priority break-in paging to all stations
simultaneously. Busy stations are placed on hold and automatically reconnected
when the emergency all call page is terminated.
Group Page with Reply

Key 095 + 1-9
One-way voice paging to all non-busy members of one of nine pre-programmed
groups of stations in a partition. The station displays: GROUP PAGE 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9. An LCD message prompts the called stations to reply by keying
T. Group assignment for the station is made in program mode.
General Options
General options described below begin with the initial keypress sequence of 094.
Day Mode Selection

Key 0940
When the user at an admin master enters 0940, the admin master will be placed
into Day Mode operation.

General Options Operation
Night Mode Selection

Key 0941
When the user at an admin master enters 0941, the admin master will be placed
into Night Mode operation.
Privacy
Key 09491PDDDD
This allows the user to adjust privacy settings for call-in stations.
P = Privacy Setting
• 0 = Non-Private
• 1 = Private
DDDD = Stations
• 0000 = Change privacy settings at all call-in stations

• Ext # = Change privacy setting at specific station
When entering local station numbers, it is not necessary to fill in all four digits in
the station extension area.
Volume
Key 09492VDDDD
The user can adjust volume settings for call-in stations.
V = Volume
• Volume range is from 0 (softest) to 9 (loudest).
DDDD = Stations
• 0000 = Adjust volume at all call-in stations

• Ext # = Adjust volume at specific station
When entering local station numbers, it is not necessary to enter all four digits in
the station extension area.

Help Menu
Key 0 + DK, DL
Display a list of active features with corresponding access keys.
Hold
Key 1
When connected to a station, either party can place the call on hold by taking the
following steps:
1. While connected press 1.

2. Both stations will display HOLDING with the held party receiving the hold
tone.
3. The originator of the hold can restore the call by pressing T.
4. Either party may disconnect while on hold by hanging up the handset, or by
pressing X.
Hold & Transfer

Key 2
The Hold & Transfer feature allows a connected party to place the current call on
hold and transfer the call to another party. Conference calls are excluded from this
feature.
1. When connected to a station, press 1.

2. Dial the extension of the station to which the call is being transferred. When
connected, press 2.
3. The transfer will then be complete and the station that executed the transfer
will return to being idle.
Hold & Consult

The Hold & Consult feature allows a connected party to place the current call on
hold and call another party to consult. After consulting, the call placed on hold
may be reconnected. Perform a Hold & Consult through the following procedure:
1. When connected to a station, place the call on hold by pressing 1.

2. Enter the extension of the party to consult.
3. After consulting, press X to disconnect the consult call
4. Press T to reconnect to the party placed on hold.

Message Waiting with Tone Alert

Key 7
The ability to leave a message on the LCD screen at a called station requesting a
return call from the called station. A tone sounds at pre-programmed intervals to
alert the called station to the message. The LCD screen reads: MESSAGE
FROM NNN, RESPOND PRESS T. A maximum of eight different
messages may be stored at a station. When the maximum number of messages is
exceeded, the station displays: MESSAGE BOX FULL.
Mobile Communication
Key 091
Sub-menu:
2 = Two-way Radio
Selecting 2, the Two-way Radio Interface displays: SELECT 2-WAY
CHANNEL (0-9). Keying 09120 selects two-way radio channel 0. (0600)
Press T to talk and close PTT contacts, release to listen or X to disconnect.
Requires Cat. 4363 Two-way Radio Interface station.
Music Program Distribution

Key 097 + 0-9
Master stations may select from 10 channels of programmed audio sources.
Displays: SELECT MUSIC CHANNEL 0-9. This feature requires Cat.
ECHO-BGM Program Distribution Station for each channel.
Mute
Key 9
This feature allows the attendant to mute the microphone for privacy reasons. The
LCD displays MUTE for the duration of the keystroke.
One-way Audio
Key T
While an audio connection is established between an master station and a
substation, force audio communication to be one-way from the master station by
pressing and holding either T, or Intercom Push to Talk. While the this key is
held down, the microphone at the substation will be muted and audio direction will
be one-way from the master station.

Partitions
The exchange has 99 partitions. Stations in the same partition can communicate
with each other. Communication between stations in different partitions may be
blocked. A station may be programmed to belong to any one of 99 partitions or
partition 0. A station in partition 0 may communicate with any partition. Partition
0 is usually reserved for an attendant position.
Master stations belonging to partition 0 may communicate with stations in any of

the 99 partitions, in the usual manner, by keying in that station’s extension. When
a station in partition 0 executes a Group Page, All-Call or PA Page access code,
that station will display a sub-menu prompt: ENTER PARTITION. Enter the
two digit number 01-99 (leading zeros required) that identifies the partition in
which the Group Call, All-Call or PA Page is to be directed. The screen that fol
lows is the conventional screen allowing the choice of Page Group Number or PA
Page Zone.
Stations can only communicate with other stations according to the descriptions
below. Partitions can be assigned as follows:
• Partitions 1–49 restrict admin and standard calls. Stations within one of
these partitions can only place and receive calls to and from other stations
in the same partition (or Partition 0) for both admin and standard calls.
• Partitions 50–99 restrict admin only calls. Stations within one of these
partitions can place and receive a standard call to and from any partition
50-99, but admin calls are restricted to stations only within their given
partition (or Partition 0).
• Partition 0 is not restricted. Stations assigned partition 0 can place and
receive standard and admin calls across all partitions.
Partition 0 is commonly assigned as overseer to master stations, allowing them to
communicate with stations in any partition.
Preempt/Break-In
Key T (while 'Busy' is displayed)
This function permits authorized stations to interrupt an existing two-party
conversation. The preempted party is placed on hold. The original connection will
be restored when preemption is terminated.
Preempt Programming Options
Inbound Only
The station can be preempted but cannot preempt another.
Outbound Only
The station can preempt, but cannot be preempted by another.

Both Inbound and Outbound

The station can be preempted and can preempt another.
Disabled
Preempting capabilities, both inbound and outbound, are disabled.
Privacy Setting (Master Station)

Key 092 & 1, 2, 3, or 4
The four levels of station privacy are described as follows:
Non-Private (Privacy Level 1)

A station will connect automatically when called. The microphone will be
operational.
Semi-Private (Privacy Level 2)

A station in Semi-Private will automatically answer when called, but the
microphone is muted until answered by pressing T, or by going off-hook.
Full-Private (Privacy Level 3)

A station set to Full-Private receives an interrupted ring and may connect
either by pressing the T key or by going off-hook. The display at the calling
party reads: RINGING.
Do Not Disturb (Privacy Level 4)

A station that is set to Do Not Disturb appears busy to calling stations.
Public Address Page

Key 096
To place a PA Page, the user will key 096, then a zone number (0-9). PA page
stations within that specific zone will receive the page.
PA paging requires the ECHO-PAI PA Page station. One ECHO-PAI PA Page station is
required for each zone.
Speed Dial, Two-Digit

Key 0 then (1-8)
Speed dialing offers two-digit dialing to any one of up to eight programmed
extensions. When connected to any station keying '0 (1-8)' will record/overwrite or
delete that extension for future speed dialing. The LCD will read SPEED

Operation Auto Conference
DIAL SET to confirm the change. Two-digit speed dial options are
programmable using the ECHO-SFW application or local installer mode.
Speed Dial, Single-Digit

Key (6-9)
Single-digit speed dialing allows single-digit calling to any one of four pre-
programmed extensions. Single-digit speed dial extensions must be programmed
using the ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software.
Volume Control
Key V+, V-
Digital volume control keys permit independent adjustment of voice or ring tone
levels. These keys allow adjustment for loudspeaker and handset operation. When
one of the buttons is pressed, the adjusted volume level will be displayed on the
LCD.
Auto Conference
Introduction
The auto conference feature allows one-touch, instantaneous conference setup of
up to five members.
Specifications
Station Types
The following station types can be included in auto conference groups:
• Direct Select Master Stations

• Master Stations
• Substations

Auto Conference Operation
Station Location
• The 48 line card positions of the first digital switch (L001-01 through
L001-49) support auto conference groups. Stations to be included in auto
conference groups must be must be connected to one of these line card
positions. Stations cannot be included in an auto conference group if they
are not located within L001-01 through L001-49.
• A ECHO-RMMC Conference Card must be installed in L001.
Connection
• Non-originating members may disconnect at any time

• If the originator disconnects, the conference will terminate
• It the conference consists of two members only, when one member
disconnects, the conference will terminate.
• Auto Conference connection time will be less than one second.
Preempt
• When an auto conference is initiated, stations belonging to that group will

be preempted and will automatically join the conference.
• If a station is a member of more than one auto conference group, an auto
conference in progress will be preempted by a second auto conference to
which that station is a member. The first auto conference will not resume
automatically at that station when the second auto conference is
terminated. If this station was the initiator of the first auto conference, then
that conference will terminate at all members, even if they are not part of
the second auto conference.
• An emergency all call will preempt the auto conference. The conference
will not resume upon termination of the emergency all call.
Privacy
• Auto Conference will override the privacy settings for the group members
and will connect in non-private mode.
Limits
• There will be a maximum of ten auto conference groups (0090-0099) with

up to five members each. Members may belong to up to four different auto
conference groups.
• If all conference resources are in use due to preexisting manual or
automatic conferences, auto conference will be blocked.

Operation Auto Conference
Auto Conference Assignment

A station is assigned to an auto conference group as follows:
In local programming, enter the conference code number 0090 to 0099 into any or
all of the four available single digit speed dial bins (#6, #7, #8, or #9 for master
stations; #1, #2, #3, or #4 for substations)
Stations that share the same four-digit conference code in any of their single digit
speed dial bins belong to the same auto conference group. Sample assignments are
illustrated in Table 1.
Master Station Bin #6 Bin #7 Bin #8 Bin #9

101 0090 0091 0092 0093
102 0091 0093 0095 0097
103 0090 0092 0094 0096
104 0090 0091 0095 0097
105 0092 0093 0094 0095
Table 7.1: Single Digit Speed Dial Assignments for Master Stations
Examples
1. Master station 101 initiates a conference by pressing the #8 key. Stations with
0092 in one of the speed dial bins will be included in the conference. In this
case, stations 101, 103, and 105 are conferencing.
2. Master station 103 initiates an auto conference by pressing the #6 key. Stations
with 0090 in one of the single digit speed dial bins will be included in the
conference. In this case, stations 101, 103, and 104 are conferencing.
3. Master station 104 initiates an auto conference by pressing the #9 key. Stations
with 0097 in one of the single digit speed dial bins are now conferencing. In
this case, stations 102 and 104 are conferencing.
In Example 1, the user at station 103 may exit the conference by pressing the
Cancel button. Since station 103 was not the originator, stations 101 and 105 will
remain connected in conference. If station 101 had disconnected first, then the
conference would end because station 101 was the originator.
In Example 3, if station, 102 or 104 disconnects, the conference will end because
they are the only two stations in conference.

E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station Operation
E-MDS/E-MDSMG Administrative Master Station

Operation
Incoming Calls
Incoming calls may be answered by either using automatic call selection or by

scrolling to select calls from the queue out of priority.
Automatic Call Selection

Automatic call selection will select the highest priority call on the system. Calls
are queued according to call priority and the time placed on the system. Use the
automatic call selection feature by one of the two following actions:
• Lifting the handset to establish an audio connection

• Pressing the T key to establish an audio connection
Scrolling Call Selection

Calls may be answered out of order without regard to priority. When multiple calls
are placed on the system, the attendant may scroll through the calls using DK, DL.
The LCD displays call information. When the desired call is displayed on the
LCD, the attendant may answer it by one of the following actions:
• Lift the handset to establish an audio connection

• Press the T key to establish an audio connection
If using the T key to answer a call, be sure to press and release the key. Holding
the T key down will force one-way communication from the master to the calling
station and that calling station’s microphone will be muted.
Whether a call is answered by automatic call selection or scrolling call selection,

unanswered calls remain queued according to priority and may be answered using
either method.
Placing Calls
Handset Operation
For handset operation, the attendant will pick up the handset and connect with an
extension by performing one of the following actions:
• Dial an extension number using the numeric keypad

• Dialing a programmed speed-dial extension
• Pressing the T to connect to the most recently connected extension

Operation E-DSM/E-DSMGHandset Master Stations
Hands-Free Operation
The handset can be left on-hook and one of the connection methods described
above can be used. When connection is established, the operator will not lift the
handset to speak, but will speak through the panel microphone.
The LCD will display CALL TO (Extension Number) indicating a connection is
established.
In both modes, the attendant at the master station has the option of muting the
microphone at the room station by pressing T. While this button is held down at the
master station, communication is one-way from the master to the room station.
Canceling a Call
Calls or pages may be cancelled in any of the following ways:
• Hang-up the handset

• Press the X key
E-DSM/E-DSMG Handset Master Stations

Operation
Incoming Calls
Incoming calls may be answered by either using automatic call selection or by

scrolling to select calls in any order, regardless of where they are in the queue.

Automatic call selection will select the highest priority call on the system. Calls
are queued according to call priority and time placed on the system. Calls are
answered by auto call selection by one of the following actions:
• Lift the handset to establish an audio connection

• Press the T key to establish an audio connection
If using the T key to answer a call, be sure to press and release the key. Holding
the T key down will force one-way communication from the master to the calling
station and that calling station’s microphone will be muted.

E-IST Master Stations Operation
Placing Calls
Handset Operation
For handset operation, the attendant will pick up the handset and connect with an
extension by performing one of the following actions:
• Dial an extension number using the numeric keypad

• Dialing a programmed speed-dial extension
• Pressing T to connect to the most recently connected extension
Hands-Free Operation
The handset can be left on-hook and one of the connection methods described
above can be used. When connection is established, the operator will not lift the
handset to speak, but will speak through the panel microphone.
The LCD will display CALL TO (extension number) indicating a connection is
established.
In both modes, the attendant at the master station has the option of muting the
microphone at the room station by pressing T. While this button is held down at the
master station, communication is one-way from the master to the room station.
Canceling a Call
Calls or pages may be cancelled by one of the following actions:
• Hang-up the handset

• Press the X key
E-IST Master Stations

Operation
Incoming Calls
Incoming calls may be answered by either using automatic call selection, or by

pressing the T key.

Automatic call selection will select the highest priority call on the system. Press
the T key for automatic call selection.
When using the T key to answer a call, be sure to press and release the key.
Holding the T key down will force one-way communication from the master to the
calling station and that calling station’s microphone will be muted.

Operation E-DD1/E-DD2Single and Multi-Call Substations
Placing Calls
Place a call by dialing the station extension number.
Canceling a Call
Cancel calls by pressing X while an audio connection is present between the

master station and the substation.
E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Multi-Call Substations

Operation
Placing Calls
The E-DD1/E-DD2 Substations may be programmed to call any other station in the
system. They are capable of placing both admin and standard type calls. Each call
button on the substation may be assigned to place one call. Destination, call-type,
and priority level are programmed using ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software
or through programming using Installer Mode.
To place a call, select the appropriate call button. Admin calls will be queued at the
master station and may be answered either automatically or selectively by the
attendant at that master station.
Indicator LED
The indicator LED illuminates as follows:
• LED lights steadily to indicate that a call was placed from the substation
• LED flashes rapidly to indicate that an audio connection is present between
the substation and another station in the system
Canceling a Call
The audio connection may be canceled at the substation by pressing the Cancel
button.

E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substations Operation
E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substation

Operation
Placing Calls
Place a call by pressing and releasing the call button. The E-SSSB2 is equipped with
two call buttons, each of which may be programmed for a different destination or
call priority.
Relay Operation
The E-SSMB1/13 High-Security Substations may be programmed for four modes of

relay operation. Relay modes of operation are determined by the positions of
jumpers on ST1 and ST2.

Operation E-SSMB1/13, E-SSMB1KR & E-SSSB2 High-Security Substations
Relay Modes of Operation

ST1/ST2 are considered in the On position when there is a jumper connecting the
two pins of either ST1 or ST2. They are in the Off position when there is no
jumper connection between the pins.
Mode ST2 ST1 Relay State

1 OFF OFF Activated with Remote #4 Key
Activated when call placed
2 OFF ON
Deactivated when call canceled
Activated when call placed
3 ON OFF
Deactivated with audio connection
Activated when audio connected
4 ON ON
Deactivated when audio is disconnected
Table 7.2: High-Security Substation Relay
Mode 1
Remote Control. When an audio connection is active between the master station
and the substation, the attendant at the master station will press the 4 key to
energize the relay at the substation. Mode 1 is the factory default setting.
Mode 2
Call Control. The substation relay is automatically energized when a call button is
pressed on the substation. The relay remains energized until the audio connection
is terminated.
Mode 3
Active when call placed. When set to Mode 3 of operation, the relay is energized
when the call is placed and deenergized when an audio connection is established.
Mode 4
Active when audio connected. When set to Mode 4 operation, the relay is
energized when an audio connection is established and is deenergized when the
audio connection is terminated.
Application
• Mode 1 is typically used to activate a door release at the substation.

• Modes 2, 3, and 4 are typically used in conjunction with a connected strobe
light (such as a Federal Signal Cat. 9507 Strobe Light).

4308/09 Sentinel Sound Detector Substation Operation

Operation
Placing Calls
Calls can be placed at Sentinel stations in one of two ways:
• Detecting a qualified audio event

• Physically pressing the call button on the station
While either of these methods may be used to place a call on the system using the
Sentinel station, it is important to understand that these are two separate and
distinct methods of placing calls. The physical button on the substation will place
the call programmed in Button #1 attributes in the local programming for the
Sentinel substation.
When a call is placed using sound detection, the Sentinel substation will place a
call to the extension programmed in Button #4 of the Sentinel station’s local
attributes.
Calls are canceled at the master station. An audio connection will remain until the
attendant at the master station disconnects.

Operation Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface

Operational Modes
Inbound Mode 1
While in Inbound Mode 1, calls from a PBX phone can be placed to any station
within the ECHO system. The Inbound Mode functions as follows:
1. The 4362 PBX Interface receives a call from an outside phone.

2. A connection is made and the outside phone receives the ECHO internal
dial tone.
3. The calling party on the PBX phone may now key in the extension of any ECHO
station.
4. The called master station will go to full private mode and will ring. (If the
station being called is set to Do Not Disturb, a busy signal will sound at the
PBX phone.) The calling party will receive a ring-back tone and the called
station may answer the call as follows: the called master station answers the
call by lifting the handset or pressing the Talk button
5. Calls to substations set to Non-Private will connect automatically
6. Calls to substations set to Semi-Private will receive one-way communication
from the calling PBX phone. To switch to VOX communication, the button at
the substation must be pressed, then released. All communication after the
button has been pressed and released will be in VOX mode.
Accessible Features in Mode 1 Operation
While in Mode 1 operation, the calling party may access additional features.
Group Page
The calling party enters 095 and group number (1-8) to be paged. A group number
of (9) will cause a page to be placed to members of all groups. To quit the group
page, press # or go on hook. The group page may terminate automatically after a
pre-programmed amount of time. No reminder will be left at group page receiving
stations. The PBX interface cannot receive group pages.
Public Address Page

The calling party enters 096 then the PA Page Interface number (0-9) to be
activated. To quit the PA page, press # or go on hook. The PA page may terminate
automatically after a pre-programmed amount of time.
All-Call Page
The calling party enters 098. To terminate an all-call page, press # or go on hook.
The Page Time Limit attribute may also be used to terminate an all-call page. The
PBX Interface cannot receive all-call pages. No reminder reply will be left at all-
call receiving stations.

Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface Operation
The PBX Interface All Call attribute (local) must be set to Place Only.
Emergency All-Call Page

The calling party enters 099. To terminate an emergency all-call page, press the
"#" key or go on hook. The Page Time Limit attribute may be set to terminate an
emergency all-call page. The PBX Interface cannot receive emergency all-call
pages.
The PBX Interface Emergency All Call attribute (local) must be set to Place only.
Single Digit Speed Dial

The calling party enters one of the following digits, 6, 7, 8, or 9 to call a pre-
programmed ECHO station or to activate a pre-programmed feature. Buttons
#1-#4 correspond directly to Speed Dial digits 6–9. These buttons can be
programmed to place standard calls by entering ECHO extension numbers. The
following features can be activated through single digit speed dial:
• Group Page (enter 095X, where X is the group number to page)
• All-Call (enter 098)
• Emergency All-Call (enter 099)
Preempt
The calling party attempts to dial a ECHO station but gets the busy tone. The
caller may press the star key "*" to preempt the called station. When the
conversation is complete, the original connection will be restored.
The PBX Interface Preempt attribute (local) must be set to Outbound Only.
Door Access
After a connection is made to a ECHO substation that is equipped with a relay,
the calling party may activate the relay by pressing and holding 4 on the PBX
phone. Releasing 4 will deenergize the substation's relay. This feature requires that
the DTMF tone created when pressing 4 is maintained for the duration of the
keystroke.

Operation Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface
Inbound Mode 2
Inbound Mode 2 allows PBX phones to call in to a preset ECHO extension and
functions as follows:
1. The Cat. 4362 PBX Interface receives a call from a PBX phone and establishes
a connection.
2. If the pre-programmed extension corresponds to a master station, the master
station will automatically be placed in full privacy mode and will ring. If the
station you are calling is set to Do Not Disturb, a busy signal will sound at the
PBX phone. The calling party receives ring back tone. The called master
station may answer the call by lifting the handset or pressing the Talk button.
3. If the pre-programmed extension corresponds to a substation, substations set to
Non-Private will connect automatically. Substations set to Semi-Private will
receive one-way communication from the calling PBX phone. To switch to
vox communication, the button at the substation must be pressed, then
released. All communication after the button has been pressed and released
will be in Vox Mode.
If the called station is associated with a relay contact (digital substations only), the
caller can activate that contact on the substation by pressing 4 on the PBX phone
after connection to the substation.
Outbound Mode
Outbound Mode allows stations to place calls to outside phones. The master station
will dial an installer-specified extension number to access an outside line. The
master station will receive the outside dial tone and may use the keypad to dial and
outside telephone number. Dialing key details are displayed in the table below:
Dialing Key Function

0–9 Enter telephone number
T Character “*”
DL Character “#”
X Disconnect
Table 7.3: Dialing Keys
When programming, the number entered for access must contain the same number
of digits as extensions. (Example: A system with three-digit extensions, could
have an 999 as the access number. In a system with two-digit extensions, the
outside access number could be 99.) Dial outbound extensions as follows:

Cat. 4362 PBX Telephone Interface Operation
Outbound Calls from Master Stations

A master station is able to dial an outside line by dialing the access out number,
waiting for a dial tone, then dialing the outside telephone number.
Outbound Calls from Substations

Substations with no numeric keypad can be programmed to place calls to an
outside line through the PBX Interface. The substation can place a call to the
number entered in “Automatic Dialing Keys" (using ECHO-SFW software or "Auto
Dial Phone #" (in Local Installer Mode). Substations can place calls to outside
lines through the PBX Interface as follows:
Substation Placing Standard Call to Master

Criteria:
1. Master station must have the Access Out number entered into Two-Digit
Speed Dial Bin #08.
2. A Call Forward No Answer time limit must be programmed for the master
station. (Call Forward No Answer Time Limit must be less than Ring Time
Limit.)
3. Master station must be set to Full Private.
4. Substation is programmed to place a standard call to the master station.
In this scenario, the substation will place the standard call to the master. The
master station will ring to indicate the call. When the call is not answered within
the Call Forward No Answer time limit, the standard call placed by the substation
will be forwarded to the PBX Interface which will dial the number entered in Auto
Dial Phone #. The substation will connect to the outside line.
Substation Placing Standard Call to Master set to Call Forward

Criteria:
1. Master station is set to forward calls to PBX Interface. Master station is set to
forward calls to the PBX Interface by keying 093, then the number for Access
Out.
2. Substation is programmed to place a standard call to the master station.
When the substation places the standard call to the master station, it will
immediately be forwarded to the PBX Interface, which will dial the number set in
Auto Dial Phone # and establish the connection between the substation and the
outside line.

Operation ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface
Substation Placing Standard Call to PBX Interface

Criteria:
1. Substation is programmed to place a standard call to the Access Out extension.

When the substation places the standard call, the PBX Interface will establish a
connection between that substation and the outside line designated as the Auto
Dial Phone #.The substation must have one of its buttons programmed to dial the
Access Out number. When that substation button is activated, the outside access
number will be dialed and when a line is open, the telephone number will be dialed
that was entered into the Automatic Dialing Keys section in global programming.

Operation
Receiving a Standard Call
When the Caller ID (CID) telephone is called, the extension number and directory
name of the calling station will appear on the telephone display. (See sample LCD
below)
CONFERENCE ROOM
104
Originating a Call
To originate a call from the CID telephone to another station in the system, go off
hook and dial the extension number of the party you wish to contact.
Quitting a Call
Place the CID telephone on hook to quit a call.
Placing a Station on Hold
1. Press 1 to place the station that is currently in communication with the CID
telephone on hold.
2. Restore communication by pressing "*" on the CID telephone.

ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface Operation
Call Transfer
To transfer a call using the CID telephone:
1. Press 1 to place the station that is currently communicating with the CID
telephone on hold.
2. Dial the station extension to which the call will be transferred.
3. When communication is established between that station and the CID
telephone, press 2 to transfer the call.
Conference
Establish a conference using a CID telephone by the following procedure:
1. Call the first station that will be part of the conference.

2. When audio connection is established, press 3 on the CID telephone.
3. Dial the extension of the second station to be included in the conference.
4. Press 3 when communication is established to add station to conference.
5. Continue until desired members are entered.
6. Press "*" to join the conference once desired members have been added.
7. End the conference by placing the CID telephone on hook.
Single Digit Speed Dial
Buttons 6, 7, 8, and 9 are programmable for single-digit speed dialing. To program

a button for single-digit speed dial, connect to a station, and press 86, 87, 88, or 89.
These correspond directly to single-digit speed dial keys 6, 7, 8, and 9. If a station
is not assigned to speed dial, this will add that station to one of the four keys. If the
station is already assigned, this action will remove it from the speed dial key.
Two-Digit Speed Dial
There are eight possible two-digit speed dial sequences on the CID telephone, 01,
02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, and 08. While connected to a station, press the two-digit
speed dial designation you would like to be assigned to that station. This will add
the station to that speed dial position. If the station is already programmed in that
speed dial designation, this action will remove it from speed dialing.
Call Forward
To forward all calls to another station, the user must go off hook and press 093
then the extension of the station that will receive forwarded calls. Disable call
forwarding by going off-hook and pressing #.

Operation ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface
To forward unanswered calls to another station after a preprogrammed time

interval, the user should program station extension into the two-digit speed dial
sequence 08.
The Ring Time Limit must be greater than the Call Forward No Answer time limit
for Call Forward No Answer.
All Call
Originate All Call Page

1. Go off hook.
2. Press 098 to initiate the page
Terminate All Call Page

1. Go on hook or press #.
Verify that the CID phone local setting for all call is Place Only.
Group Page
The CID phone may originate group pages. The user should go off-hook and press
095 followed by the group number (1-8) to initiate a group page to specific groups
or press 9 to initiate the group page to all groups. To terminate a group page, press
# or go on hook. The CID phone cannot receive group pages.
Public Address Page
The CID phone may originate Public Address Pages. The user should go off hook
and press 096 followed by the Public Page Zone number (0-9) to initiate a Public
Address Page. To terminate a Public Address Page, press # or go on hook.
Emergency All Call Page
The CID phone may originate emergency all call pages. The user should go off-
hook and press 099 to initiate an emergency all call page. To terminate an
emergency all call page, press # or go on hook. The CID phone cannot receive
emergency all call pages.

ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface Operation
The CID phone EM ALL CALL attribute (local) must be set to Place Only.
Message Set
The CID phone may leave messages at master stations that are unoccupied or busy.
To leave a message the user should press 7 while connected to a master station or
while receiving the busy signal after calling a master station.
The CID interface will not display messages.
Door Access
The CID phone may control the relay of a substation. To energize the relay of a
substation, the user must press 4 while an audio connection is established to the
substation. To de-energize the substation relay the user should release the 4 key.
Some phones create a short pulse of DTMF when a key is pressed and held, this
will cause the substation relay to energize and de-energize very quickly. This
feature requires sustained DTMF tones to maintain relay contact closure.
Preempt/Break In
The CID phone may preempt existing audio connections. The user should press the
* key while receiving the busy tone after calling a station. The connection that the
called phone had will be terminated, and a connection will be made to the CID
phone. After the audio connection due to the preemption is terminated, the original
audio connection will be reestablished.
The CID phone pre-empt attribute (local) must be set to Inbound Only or In &
Outbound.
Call Last Caller/Last Number Redial
To call the last extension that called the CID phone or redial the extension last
called by the CID phone, the user should go off hook then press the "*" key.

Operation Cat. 5265 Direct Select Console
Receiving Admin Type Calls
To receive admin type calls from substations the CID Interface must be assigned
ownership. When a substation whose calls are preprogrammed to annunciate at
CID interfaces with the proper day/night ownership, the phone will ring three
times and display the room number and pre-programmed call text for that call type
as illustrated below:
104: ROOM CALL
Answer Displayed Call

Answer the displayed call by pressing the Talk button on the CID telephone before
the end of the third ring. An audio connection will be established between the CID
telephone and the substation.
If the three-ring sequence has ended, press the Talk button, then the "*" (star) key
to establish an audio connection with the calling station.
Terminate Audio Connection

Terminate the audio connection by pressing the Talk key while connected to the
substation. This action will cancel non-locking calls. If additional admin calls are
queued for that CID telephone, the phone will ring and the call information for the
admin call will display on the LCD of the CID telephone.
Cat. 5265 Direct Select Console

Incoming Calls
When a call is placed on the system, an alert tone will sound at the master station
and the room selector key LED will light. Calls may be answered directly by
pressing the room selector key and speaking into the handset or the panel
microphone. Multiple calls will be queued according to priority and time placed.
The highest call in the queue according to this prioritization will display on the
LCD. Calls may be answered directly, out of order, as follows:
• Press the desired room selector key and speak into the panel microphone or
lift the handset.
• Scroll through calls using D", D" until reaching the desired call as
displayed on the LCD, then press Intercom Push to Talk and operating
hands-free, or lift the handset.

Cat. 5265 Direct Select Console Operation
LED Assignment
The Cat. 5265 Direct Select Master station LEDs are assigned from the upper left
corner to the lower right corner. The LEDs are assigned to substations whose
admin calls report to the Cat. 5265 Direct Select Master. LEDs are assigned in two
groups, day ownership and night ownership. Substations that are part of the day
ownership are assigned the first block of LEDs in order of ascending extension
numbers. While substations whose admin calls the master annunciates only while
in the night mode are considered part of the night ownership. Substations that are
part of the night ownership are assigned the second block (immediately following
the last station LED in the first block) of LEDs in order of ascending extension
numbers. Master stations and substations that are programmed to place standard
calls are not assigned LEDs. Substations that are not part of the day or night
ownership, but whose call is displayed due to the No Answer Call Forward feature
will not be assigned an LED. Cat. 5265 LEDs are reassigned when Restore Factory
Defaults or Direct Select Master Reconfigure is chosen from the Global Attributes
screen through the ECHO-SFW software.
Call Priority LEDs
Call priority LEDs indicate the priority levels of current calls placed on the system.
Call priority lights are as follows:
• Routine-Green LED, lights when a routine call is placed

• Emergency-Red LED, lights when an emergency call is placed
• Call Engineer-Yellow LED, lights to signify failed system equipment
These LEDs will remain steady lit until the call has been answered, or the problem
causing the Call Engineer LED to light has been rectified.
LCD Display
The LCD displays the extension and name (as entered through programming) of
the calling station. It also displays the priority of the call. The LCD will display the
highest priority call. To view other calls, the attendant may use DK, DL to scroll
through calls on the LCD. When the desired call displays on the LCD, the
attendant may answer it by one of the following actions:
• Lifting the handset when the desired call is displayed to establish

communication with the calling station
• Pressing the Intercom Push to Talk button when the desired call is
displayed to established hands-free communication

Operation Cat. 5265 Direct Select Console
LED Indicators
The Cat. 5265 Direct Select Master is equipped with different types of LED
indicators:
• Call priority and system trouble indicator LEDs

• Room key selector LEDs
• Function Key LED
• Emergency Page LED
• Emergency Tone LED
Call Priority and Trouble Indicator LEDs

Call priority LEDs indicate the priorities of calls placed on the system. The two
priorities for calls on this system are Routine and Emergency. Emergency level
calls are indicated by the red LED and routine calls are indicated by the green
LED.
The emergency status of this call is indicated visually

on the LCD, by a rapidly pulsing red LED at room
selector key, and by a steadily lit red call-priority LED.
Figure 7.2: Emergency Call Placed

ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface Operation
Room Key Selector LEDs

LED indicators are located at each room selector key. Calls placed on the system
are indicated at the room selector key by a red LED. The status of the call is
indicated by the rate at which the LED is flashing. A routine call is indicated by a
slowly pulsing LED. An emergency call is indicated by a rapidly pulsing LED. In
the example illustrated in Figure 7.2, the LED at the room selector key for room
101 would be pulsing rapidly, indicating an emergency call. When the call is
selected, the LED will switch from flashing to steadily lit, indicating as audio
connection has been made.
If a station is set up to receive an audio program, the LED for that station will be lit
steady green or orange, depending on the selected audio program. When a call is
placed, the LED will turn red and will extinguish when the call is cancelled. If
audio programming is set at that station, the LED will turn back to the color
denoting the audio program setting, either green or orange.
Function Key LEDs

Each function key has an LED associated with it. When the LED is lit, the function
key is active.
Emergency Page LED

This red LED is lit steadily while Emergency Page is active.
ECHO-RMRI Voice Recorder Interface

Operation supports two modes for any channel on the ECHO-RMRI Interface, Type I and
Type II.
Type I
A station (typically a substation) connects directly with a channel on the ECHO-RMRI
Interface. When the substation call button is activated, a one-way connection is
made from the substation to a pre-programmed channel on the ECHO-RMRI Interface.
Type II
Both sides of a conversion between two stations are sent to a pre-programmed
channel of a ECHO-RMRI Interface. A station is assigned to a particular channel on a
ECHO-RMRI Interface. When that particular station makes a connection to any other station,
audio from the microphones of both connected stations is sent to the ECHO-RMRI
Interface channel.
Use of this feature when the executive override warning tone is disabled may be
interpreted as a violation of federal or state laws, and an invasion of privacy.
Consult counsel with respect to applicable law before intruding on calls using this
feature.

Troubleshooting
.
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Station Fault Isolation

Because all stations are individually wired to the MDF, the malfunction of one
station or its connecting wire pair will affect only that station and not propagate to
other stations in the exchange. Each station line pair is foldback current limited. If
the line conductors become shorted or draw excessive current, the Line Card
voltage source will open circuit and automatically restore when the fault is
removed. Line card PCBs may be removed and inserted without removing power.
A failed, configured station will be indicated on the Alarm Card.
Central Exchange Diagnostic Indicators

The ECHO series 4600 Central Exchange contains LED diagnostic indicators
that may be used to determine the operating status of each module in the exchange.
The indicators are located on the ECHO-RMAC Alarm, ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch,
ECHO-RMMC Modem cards and ECHO-RMPS Power Rack and may be viewed from
the front of the cabinet through the glazed door panel.
ECHO-RMACAlarm Card
The ECHO-RMAC Alarm Card has a blue handle and contains a tri-color LED
indicator that displays the node status within a completely configured exchange.
Each colored LED has its own distinctive meaning, and are as follows:
Green: All systems are functioning within normal limits.
Yellow: There is a failed station(s) in the system.
If the yellow LED indicator is lit, it means that there is a failed station in the
system. Stations with non-zero extensions are not communicating with the
exchange. Use PC Diagnostic to identify the node and pair of failed station(s).
Red: Major system functions are not operating within the normal limits.
If the red LED indicator is lit, check the status of all digital switches and modem
card LEDs within the exchange to localize the problem to a node, as a modem link
or power rack may have failed.

Central Exchange Diagnostic Indicators Maintenance & Troubleshooting
ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Card

A L
The ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch card has a yellow handle.
C I
8
T N
I
V
K
S Cluster LED Indicators
E
The flashing green Code Running LED is the most important for
determining operating status of each node. A digital switch which is
not running code will cause an alarm condition on the alarm card.
** indication in diagnostic mode only.
Green Flashing Green Flashing
U D
# #
R
1
T
5
Update - Code Running Default - Code Running
2 6
3 7 Flash on RS-232 Rcv &

U D Flash on data Tx**
4 8
1 ON
data rcv**
2
3
4 R T
5
6
7 1 5
In use - Bus 1-8 2 6
Red 3 7
4 8
Table 8.1: Cluster LED Indicators
Seven Segment Display
• Run Mode
• The current code version for each node is displayed on power-up.

Three version digits are displayed one at a time, separated by a decimal
point. (i.e.) 1.0.1.
• The number of active audio links are displayed. “0-9” steady, no
decimal point denotes 0-9 active links; “0-9” steady with decimal point
denotes 10-19 links; “0-9” flashing denotes 20-29 links; “f” denotes 30
links in use.
• Diagnostic Mode only.
CRC error link bit error count; 0-1 normal and not changing. Higher and changing
indicates possible transmission line degradation between links.
Dip Switch 1-7 ON >>>>>>

________________________________________
STANDARD NODE 1 TOP NODE
OFF 2 2 ON 2
see table Figure 8.2 on page 8-5

OFF 3 3 ON 3
NORMAL CODE 4 DEFAULT CODE
NORMAL 5 INITIALIZE NODE
N/U 6 N/U
NORMAL 7 DIAGNOSTIC
________________________________________
Node Type sw2 sw3

L Off Off
M On Off
N Off On
O On On
Table 8.2: SW #2 and SW # 3 Dipswitch Settings
ECHO-RMMC Modem Card

The red handled ECHO-RMMC Modem Card has two LED indicators:
green and red.
Green: If this LED is lit, that means the card is receiving data. In
every node, all of its modem’s green LEDs will be lit if they are
connected to another operating node (Except the Modem in the Top
Node slot 8 , “M” to “M” and “N” to “N” slots). A failed Rcv Data
condition will cause an alarm condition on the Alarm card.
Check Tx and Rx wiring between the node with failed Rx and the
RCV
node to which it is connected. See Table 4.11 modem cross connect.
DATA
Yellow: Master clock: Only one modem card in the exchange must
MSTR
CLOCK have the master clock LED illuminated. The Yellow LED denotes
the Top Node and the card must be in slot 8 of the Top Node. On
this card the Green Rcv Data LED will be OFF.

Power Supply Indicators
Each equipped power supply module has two green indicators: AC Power ON and
DC Out in limit.

Troubleshooting Station symptoms Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Master Station Diagnostic Indicators

A master station can display the following diagnostic messages on its LCD
display:
1. “FAILED”: The extension called is disconnected or failed.

2. “INVALID”: The extension called is not in the callers partition.
3. “BUSY 2”: All links busy.
4. “NO SERVICE AVAILABLE”: More than eight Administrative Masters
connected to an “L” node. Admin Master only.
5. “CONFERENCE LIMIT”: Exceeded 10 conferences in progress.
6. “MEMBER LIMIT”: Exceeded 5 members for one conference.
7. “CHANNEL LIMIT”: Exceeded 32 links for conference.
8. “FEATURE DISABLED”: This optional feature requires enabling in the
program mode.
Troubleshooting Station symptoms

Failed Stations
Single Station
Symptoms:
1. Calling master station(s) displays the following diagnostic message on their
LCD display(s) whenever a failed station is called, “FAILED” XXXX where
XXXX is the extension of the called station.
2. Yellow LED illuminates on the ECHO-RMAC Alarm Card.
3. If the failed station is a master station, there may be no LCD display or an
illegible LCD display.
Possible Reasons:
Failed station, external wiring, defective line card and open/shorted internal
wiring.
1. Remove station and check voltage across wire pair. Should read 28 VDC.
2. If not, disconnect wire pair at MDF block. Measure voltage of wire pair at
MDF block. Should read 28 VDC.
3. If not, replace station Line Card. Repeat Step 2.
4. If voltage is still not present, replace appropriate 25 pair cable from card cage
of “L” node to the MDF block.
5. If voltage reading in Step 1 was 28 VDC, replace station.
6. If voltage reading in Step 2 was 28 VDC, check wiring for open/shorted
conditions. Check station wiring for shorts to other stations or earth grounds.

Multiple Stations
All Station on “L” Node- No Communications
Symptoms:
1. Multiple stations that are connected to the same “L” node have failed.
2. The failed stations cannot communicate between themselves on their “L” node
and cannot communicate with stations on other “L” nodes.
3. Red LED illuminates on the ECHO-RMAC Alarm Card
Possible Reasons:
Defective digital switch card.
1. Verify that the green LED “CODE RUNNING” for the Digital Switch Card for
the defective “L” node is not flashing.
2. Replace the Digital Switch Card.
All Stations on “L” Node - Can Communicate Between Themselves

Only
Symptoms:
1. Multiple stations that are connected to the same “L” node have failed.
2. The failed stations can communicate between themselves on their “L” node
but cannot communicate with stations on other “L” nodes.
3. Red LED illuminates on the ECHO-RMAC Alarm Card.

Possible Reasons:
Defective modem card or open/shorted internal wiring.
1. Check the “RCV DATA” LED's on the ECHO-RMMC Modem Cards for the failed “L”
node and for the corresponding “M” node. Verify that the green LED's are lit
steadily green.
2. If not, substitute new ECHO-RMMC Modem Card(s).
3. If new modem cards do not solve problem, check wiring on MDF block for
open modem connect.
Failed Stations on Same ECHO-RMLC Line Card
Symptoms:
1. Multiple stations that are connected to the same line card have failed.
2. The failed stations cannot communicate with any station in the exchange.
3. Yellow LED illuminates on the ECHO-RMAC Alarm Card.
Possible Reasons:
Defective line card or open/shorted internal wiring.
1. Replace the Line Card.

2. If new Line Card does not solve problem, check Line Card edge connector and
back plane connector soldering.
Master Station Problems
Symptoms:
1.’X’ Cancel Button will not clear station display.
2.Incoming calls do not display on the station LCD.
Problem:
Standard Master is configured as an ADMIN MASTER
Solution:
1. Check ADMIN MASTER OWNERSHIP field in program mode.
2. ‘ADMIN OWN' “DAY/NIGHT' should be set to display ‘00’ in this field.
Symptoms:
1. Keypad selections do not echo on the station display.
2. Pressing ‘1’ or ‘2’ will attempt call placement to a programmed station.'
Problem:
Master is configured as a SUBSTATION.

Solution:
Change “STATION TYPE” To Master.
Calls Drop After Connecting
Possible Reason:
Extension of calling or called station has been duplicated on another station.
(Possible only with ECHO-SFW Programming)
General Station Problems
Called Station Cannot Talk to Calling Station
Possible Reason:
Extension of called station is duplicated on another station.
Substations
Symptoms:
Substations in idle mode will produce periodic tones that cannot be canceled
locally.
Solution:
1. Check substation’s “ADMIN OWNERSHIP” field in program mode.

2. “ADMIN OWN” “DAY/NIGHT” should be set to display ‘00’ in this field.
Procedure for uploading ECHO 460 code updates

(Required only for Feature changes or upgrades from manufacturer.)
1. From Windows Desktop choose Start -->Shut Down-->Restart in MS-DOS

Mode.
2. Have ready the floppy disk that contains both the JERONUPL.EXE upload
utility and the file to be uploaded.
3. When “C:\>” is displayed, insert the floppy disk into the floppy drive and type
in ‘A:<enter>’.
4. “A:\>” should now be displayed.
5. At this prompt type in ‘JERONUPL <update file name> .S19 <enter>’.
a. This is the message that should be displayed:
“Federal Signal software Upload utility”
“Searching for Federal Signal equipment.”
“Found connection, uploading file”
“. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .”

“Complete”
The actual upload procedure takes approximately 1 to 2 minutes. During the
upload process, the system is unusable and all master stations will display “OFF
LINE”. If the upload is successful the 7 segment LED display on each ECHO-RMDS
Digital Switch card will flash the new version number and the green update code
LED on the ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch will start flashing.
6. When the upload is complete, the “A:\>” prompt reappears. Type in ‘Exit’ to
restart Windows.
7. If the JERONUPL program cannot find a usable serial (COM) port or there is a
misconnection, the following screen may appear;
“Federal Signal software Upload utility”
“Searching for Federal Signal equipment....”
“Can’t find connection”
In the event that this error message displays;
a. Verify computer-to-ECHO 460 node cabling.
b. Verify ECHO 460 system is powered up.
8. If there is a serial data transmission error during the upload process, the “Fuel
Gauge” on the computer will stop and the Yellow RS-232 Rcv LED located on
the ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch will stop flashing. Approximately 30 seconds after the
serial error occurs, the ECHO-RMDS Digital Switches will begin running using Default
code, (Green Default Code LED will start flashing). Press any key on the
computer keyboard to abort the JERONUPL program and retry the upload.
9. Note that the JERONUPL.EXE upload utility may be invoked from the hard
disk with the stipulation that the JERONUPL.EXE and the file to be uploaded
are located in the same directory.

Appendix
Appendix A
A-2 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Appendix A Installer Worksheets
Installer worksheets are provided for recording all system settings. Worksheets for
both global and local attributes are included.
© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. A-3

Installer Worksheets Appendix A
A-4 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Echo Installation and User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Echo Installation and User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

$250.

ECHO Intercom Series

Installation & User’s Manual

Project Name: ______________ ___________

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. i

Examples of scenarios, programming procedures, or operating procedures are

A note is used to describe an item that requires special attention.

• Press the T key to answer the call.

ii © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1

ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

2 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Invalid Extension Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 3

Inserting PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Caller ID Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Cat. 4327 Elevator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

6 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Basic Programming Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

8 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 9

Message Waiting with Tone Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

10 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

ECHO-CID Caller ID Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 11

12 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Figure 1.1: Echo 460 Series Central Exchanges

Central Exchange Hardware

Central Exchange Technology

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation 1-3

Central Exchange Capacities

The Series 4600 Central Exchange is available in four standard sizes.

Total Equipped Non-Blocking

* means without conference.

Central Exchange Cabinet Expansion

Expansion to final maximum cabinet capacity is accomplished by means of plug-

It is possible to expand beyond cabinet capacity up to a maximum system capacity

1-4 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

Central Exchange Equipment

ECHO-RMPS Power Rack

ECHO-RMDS Digital Switch Processor Card

ECHO-RMMC Modem/Clock Card

ECHO-RMLC Digital Line Card

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1-5

ECHO-RMCC Conference Card

ECHO-RMAC Alarm Diagnostic Card

ECHO-RMPS Power Supply Module

ECHO-RMRI Digital Voice Recorder Interface

ECHO-RTC Real Time Clock

1-6 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

ECHO-SFW Administration Program Software

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1-7E

E-MIST/E-MISM Flush Wall Handset Master Station

1-8 © 2008 Federal Signal Corporation.

E-SSMB1L/E-SSMB1KR/E-SSSB2 High Security Single/Dual Call

E-DD1/E-DD2 Single and Dual Call

E-SSSB1KR High Security Call Station

© 2008 Federal Signal Corporation. 1-9

ECHO-ALM Alarm Supervision Station

Project Name: ____ _